TW470952B - Optical disk manufacturing apparatus - Google Patents

Optical disk manufacturing apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW470952B
TW470952B TW088116409A TW88116409A TW470952B TW 470952 B TW470952 B TW 470952B TW 088116409 A TW088116409 A TW 088116409A TW 88116409 A TW88116409 A TW 88116409A TW 470952 B TW470952 B TW 470952B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
disc
optical disc
optical
light
substrate
Prior art date
Application number
TW088116409A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Shoei Ebisawa
Kiyoshi Oshima
Norio Tsunematsu
Daisuke Ito
Original Assignee
Dainippon Ink & Chemicals
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP9361523A external-priority patent/JPH11189748A/en
Priority claimed from JP10076304A external-priority patent/JPH11273164A/en
Priority claimed from JP11078697A external-priority patent/JP2000276786A/en
Priority claimed from JP11180965A external-priority patent/JP2001014732A/en
Application filed by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals filed Critical Dainippon Ink & Chemicals
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW470952B publication Critical patent/TW470952B/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1429Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface
    • B29C65/1448Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface radiating the edges of the parts to be joined, e.g. for curing a layer of adhesive placed between two flat parts to be joined, e.g. for making CDs or DVDs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1403Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the type of electromagnetic or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1406Ultraviolet [UV] radiation
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1429Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface
    • B29C65/1454Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface scanning at least one of the parts to be joined
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1429Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface
    • B29C65/1464Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface making use of several radiators
    • B29C65/1467Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation characterised by the way of heating the interface making use of several radiators at the same time, i.e. simultaneous welding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1477Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation making use of an absorber or impact modifier
    • B29C65/1483Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation making use of an absorber or impact modifier coated on the article
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/02Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure
    • B29C65/14Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation
    • B29C65/1496Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor by heating, with or without pressure using wave energy, i.e. electromagnetic radiation, or particle radiation making use of masks
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C65/00Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C65/48Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor using adhesives, i.e. using supplementary joining material; solvent bonding
    • B29C65/4805Joining or sealing of preformed parts, e.g. welding of plastics materials; Apparatus therefor using adhesives, i.e. using supplementary joining material; solvent bonding characterised by the type of adhesives
    • B29C65/483Reactive adhesives, e.g. chemically curing adhesives
    • B29C65/4845Radiation curing adhesives, e.g. UV light curing adhesives
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/01General aspects dealing with the joint area or with the area to be joined
    • B29C66/05Particular design of joint configurations
    • B29C66/10Particular design of joint configurations particular design of the joint cross-sections
    • B29C66/11Joint cross-sections comprising a single joint-segment, i.e. one of the parts to be joined comprising a single joint-segment in the joint cross-section
    • B29C66/112Single lapped joints
    • B29C66/1122Single lap to lap joints, i.e. overlap joints
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/40General aspects of joining substantially flat articles, e.g. plates, sheets or web-like materials; Making flat seams in tubular or hollow articles; Joining single elements to substantially flat surfaces
    • B29C66/41Joining substantially flat articles ; Making flat seams in tubular or hollow articles
    • B29C66/45Joining of substantially the whole surface of the articles
    • B29C66/452Joining of substantially the whole surface of the articles the article having a disc form, e.g. making CDs or DVDs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/80General aspects of machine operations or constructions and parts thereof
    • B29C66/82Pressure application arrangements, e.g. transmission or actuating mechanisms for joining tools or clamps
    • B29C66/822Transmission mechanisms
    • B29C66/8221Scissor or lever mechanisms, i.e. involving a pivot point
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/80General aspects of machine operations or constructions and parts thereof
    • B29C66/82Pressure application arrangements, e.g. transmission or actuating mechanisms for joining tools or clamps
    • B29C66/826Pressure application arrangements, e.g. transmission or actuating mechanisms for joining tools or clamps without using a separate pressure application tool, e.g. the own weight of the parts to be joined
    • B29C66/8262Pressure application arrangements, e.g. transmission or actuating mechanisms for joining tools or clamps without using a separate pressure application tool, e.g. the own weight of the parts to be joined using "pressure means" which are associated with at least one of the parts to be joined and remain in or on it
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/80General aspects of machine operations or constructions and parts thereof
    • B29C66/83General aspects of machine operations or constructions and parts thereof characterised by the movement of the joining or pressing tools
    • B29C66/832Reciprocating joining or pressing tools
    • B29C66/8324Joining or pressing tools pivoting around one axis
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C66/00General aspects of processes or apparatus for joining preformed parts
    • B29C66/80General aspects of machine operations or constructions and parts thereof
    • B29C66/84Specific machine types or machines suitable for specific applications
    • B29C66/843Machines for making separate joints at the same time in different planes; Machines for making separate joints at the same time mounted in parallel or in series
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29LINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASS B29C, RELATING TO PARTICULAR ARTICLES
    • B29L2017/00Carriers for sound or information
    • B29L2017/001Carriers of records containing fine grooves or impressions, e.g. disc records for needle playback, cylinder records
    • B29L2017/003Records or discs
    • B29L2017/005CD''s, DVD''s

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Optical Record Carriers (AREA)

Abstract

An optical disk manufacturing apparatus is disclosed which comprises of: the nozzle for injet the cation type ultraviolet curing component; the ultraviolet irradiating device for irradiating the ultraviolet on the cation type ultraviolet curing component which dropped from the nozzle to the disk substrate; and the overlapping device for overlapping two disk substrates with the surfaces dropped with the cation type ultraviolet curing component facing each other, to form one unit of disk; advantageously a platform for loading the disk is provided for diffusing the cation type ultraviolet curing component between the two disk substrates with overlapped by the overlapping device; and advantageously the laminating device is provided for laminating a plurality of disks, and the solid disk loading device is provided for loading the solid disk having plain surface on the optical disk during laminating a plurality a plurality of disks.

Description

470952 A7 _B7_五、發明說明(f ) [技術之領域] 本發明有關於以特別之阽合方式用以製造數位視頻/ 、〜一…...... :...... 多樣化光碟(以下簡寫為DVD)等之光碟之光碟製造裝置。 K. …. . [背景技術] 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 物游將對 水因狀 通此假時其 合方,會 成用等面 壓,板 光因。環則 貼一題就 組使法相。高中該 發 α 態循, 來少問時 性,刷互化用法使 定滅狀之秒 用至生況 化時印間硬 t 方會 穩熄之産 2 劑之産情 硬況版之其等熱 到和亮生為 著中會之 線情網面使是此該 燈亮點 {鐘 接體不減 外之用著線術在,。點點持間時 為物致衰 紫合利接光技 C 熱響從行保時之 作狀大幅 用貼,使外知等發影,進燈之射 物板,大 使體物 ,紫習燈易之中易使要照 成個時度 ,物成面之,氣容良燈容需需線 c 組 2 性強 法狀組著光者氙以不之不必所外量性該過線 膜板性接發源銀所成型以 ,«)紫能化當透外 塗個化在續光水,造光所時 要耗硬,線紫 轉 2 硬布連用,的性發,況 — 需消線況外使 旋將線塗射射燈續槭績上情 中的外情紫會 有在外的照照素連機連以之(1其費紫之有體 術,紫勻後線鹵是對該鐘産著,浪以體具物 技劑型均然外屬光和在分生接}是在物體狀 。 之著合物,紫金發形,數續之秒秒,狀物板題 知接聚合璺為,之變外要連次 53 外板狀在問 習為基組重作燈燈體另需在 1 為之另個板是生 作離該的 銀為物 常,如間餘 2 之但産 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(>) 亦卽,在該DVD等,在紫外線到達接著層(以該游離 基聚合型紫外線硬化性組成物作為接著劑)前之期間, 因為有A1等之薄膜存在,紫外線強度被該等薄膜或薄層 大幅的衰減,其結果是不能獲得有效之接著為其問題。 另外,要促進硬化時需要大容量之燈設備,因此一定 會造成製品之成本之增加。另外,當使用大容量之燈時 ,因為來自該燈之傳導熱和輻射熱亦變大,所以光碟很 容易變形等為其問題。為箸防止此種問題需要在燈之周 圍另外設置冷卻設備,會使裝置全體變大和變為更加複 雜。 相反的,使燈之設備容易變小的進行紫外線硬化時, 即使不是不可能亦會使照射時間需要數十秒以上,缺乏 實用性。 用以解決上述問題之光碟之貼合方法被掲示在日本國 專利案特開平9 - 1 9 3 2 4 9號公報。亦即,該特開平9 - 1 9 3 2 4 9 號之光碟之阽合方法其待激是不連續的照射紫外線,而 是閃光式的照射。該閃光式照射紫外線之方法,當與連 續照射之情況比較時,可以抑制紫外線照射用之消耗電 力,和可以增加每單位時間之貼合之Μ數,而且可以防 止阽合後之光碟發生彎曲(翹曲),因此成為所希望之方 法。 但是此種閃光式紫外線照射方法會有以下之問題。亦 卽,在DVD作為貼合對象之情況時,在其構造上因為紫 外線要透過具有紫外線透過性較劣之A1膜,到達紫外線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -II---------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) I . 丨線· 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4 ) 經 濟 部 智 慧. 財 產 局 員 工“ 消: 費 合 社 印 製 硬化性組成物藉以使其硬化,所以在A1膜厚大於製品規 格之厚度時,硬化效率會劣化。另外,在DVD中存在有 紫外線實質上不能透過之膜(例如,ZnS-Si02膜),所 以在DVD- RAM中不能採用對存在於2 Η之光碟之阽合面 之紫外線硬化性組成物照射紫外線使其硬化藉以進行接 著之方法。 針對上逑問題之有效之貼合方法被掲示在日本國專利 案特開平9 - 6 9 2 3 9號公報。該持開平6 - 6 9 2 3 9號公報所記 載之方法其特徵是與習知之使用游離基聚合型紫外線硬 化物組成物作為接著劑之方法相對的,使用慢效性之正 離子型紫外線硬化性組成物。亦卽,在貼合之一方之光 碟之表面全面塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物,塗布 後以紫外線照射正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物,然後重 叠作為貼合對象之另外一方之光碟,然後進行加壓用來 使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物硬化。 使用該待開平6-69239號公報所記載之正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物之方法是即使在Α1膜厚較厚之情況,或 存在有紫外線實質上不能透過之ZnS-Si02等之DVD-RAM ,亦可以有效的接著。 /但是/在該特開平9-69239號公報所記載之方法中, 亦有可以再加改善之部份。亦即,在將正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物塗布在光碟基板再進行紫外線照射之方法 中,本來所需要之紫外線照射並不只限於照射在正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物,不可避免的該紫外線亦會照射 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) r'裝 訂: I, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 Β7470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (f) [Technical Field] The present invention relates to the use of a special combination method for the manufacture of digital video /, ~~ .........: various Optical disc manufacturing device for optical discs (hereinafter abbreviated as DVD). K.… .. [Background Technology] Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the product tour will respond to the cause of water. When this leave is met, they will use isostatic pressure and plate photon. Put a question on the ring to make the law. In the high school, the α-state cycle should be used to reduce time, and the method of interchanging is used to make the second of the decisive state to the state of the state. When the ink is hard, it will be steadily produced. The hot and bright life is the center of the Chinese Communist Party's love network, so this light is the highlight. When you hold it for a while, you can use it to connect the light technology C. The thermal sound is greatly posted from the time of the guarantee, so that outsiders can make a movie, the shooting board into the lamp, the ambassador's body, and the purple lamp. Among them, it is necessary to make time, material and face, and the gas capacity is good. The light capacity needs the line c. The group 2 is strong. The light group is xenon. The hair extension silver is shaped, «) Purple energy can be applied to the continuous light water when it is transparent, and it is hard to use when making the light. The line purple to 2 hard cloths are used in combination, the sexual hair, condition — need to eliminate the external condition The Xuanxuan line spotlights will continue to map the foreign affairs of the maple, and there will be external photos to connect them with the machine. Therefore, the waves and physical and technical formulations are both external and light. The composition is purple. The composition is purple-gold-shaped, and it continues for a few seconds. The change should be repeated 53 times. The outer plate is used as a base for the lamp to be reworked. The lamp body needs to be changed to 1. The other plate is made of silver. It is normal. Standards apply Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (>) Also, in this DVD etc., the ultraviolet rays reach the adhesive layer (using the free-radical polymerized ultraviolet rays) In the period before the hardening composition is used as an adhesive), the existence of thin films such as A1, the ultraviolet intensity is greatly attenuated by these films or thin layers, as a result, it is not possible to obtain effective bonding, which is a problem. In addition, it is necessary to promote hardening. Large-capacity lamp equipment is required, which will definitely increase the cost of the product. In addition, when using a large-capacity lamp, because the conductive and radiant heat from the lamp also increases, the optical disc is easily deformed, etc. In order to prevent such problems, it is necessary to provide additional cooling equipment around the lamp, which will make the entire device larger and more complicated. On the contrary, it is easy to make the lamp equipment smaller and UV curing, if not impossible. It takes tens of seconds or more to irradiate, which lacks practicability. The method of bonding optical discs to solve the above problems is shown in Japan. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-1 9 3 2 4 9. That is, the method of combining the optical disc No. 9-1 9 3 2 4 9 is a method of discontinuous irradiation with ultraviolet rays, but a flash type. When compared with the case of continuous irradiation, the flash-type ultraviolet irradiation method can reduce the power consumption for ultraviolet irradiation, and increase the number of bondings per unit time, and can prevent the combined optical disc. Bending (warping) is a desirable method. However, this flash-type ultraviolet irradiation method has the following problems. Also, when a DVD is a bonding target, the structure has a structure in which ultraviolet rays must pass through. A1 film with poor UV transmittance, reaching UV. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -II --------- install --- (Please read the back first (Notes on this page) I. 丨 Line · 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Wisdom of the Ministry of Economy. Staff of the Property Bureau "Eliminate: Feihe printed hardening composition to harden it. Thicker than product gauge If the thickness is not equal, the hardening efficiency will be deteriorated. In addition, there is a film (for example, a ZnS-Si02 film) that is substantially impermeable to ultraviolet rays in a DVD. Therefore, in a DVD-RAM, it is not possible to irradiate an ultraviolet-curable composition that exists on the bonding surface of a 2-inch disc. The method is followed by hardening. An effective bonding method for the problem of listing is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-6 9 2 3 9. The method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6-6 9 2 3 9 is characterized in that, as opposed to the conventional method of using a radical polymerization type ultraviolet curing composition as an adhesive, slow-acting positive ion ultraviolet curing is used. Sexual composition. Also, the surface of one of the bonded optical discs is fully coated with a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition, and after coating, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, and then the other disc that is the object of bonding is superposed, and Pressurization is performed to harden the positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition. The method of using the cation-type ultraviolet curable composition described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 6-69239 is a DVD-RAM such as ZnS-Si02, which has a substantially thick A1 film thickness, or ultraviolet rays which are substantially impermeable to ultraviolet rays. , Can also be effectively followed. / But / In the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-69239, there is also a part that can be further improved. That is, in the method of applying a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition to a disc substrate and then performing ultraviolet irradiation, the originally required ultraviolet irradiation is not limited to the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition, and the unavoidable ultraviolet rays are It will also be irradiated (please read the precautions on the back to write this page) r 'Binding: I, This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 Β7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 1 - -線‘ 五、發明說明(4 ) 、到由I碳酸|星形-成、之光 必要之紫外線照射,在如 薄之光碟基板,^由於來自 起熱變_形,。 另外,該正離子型紫外 外部氣體所具有之濕氣而 出到光碟之外周端面之正 硬化之進行較慢。另外, 組成物不會變形,和使該 移。在DVD中依照其規格 定值以下,假如不使用任 在指定範圍内,並不明確 /、 \ / 本發明之目的屌提供光 / , / 正離子型紫外線硬化性組 ί 11少捲入氣泡和硬化不均被Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the notes on the back to write this page) Irradiation, such as a thin disc substrate, ^ deformation due to heat from. In addition, the positive hardening of the moisture of the positive ion type ultraviolet external gas to the outer peripheral end face of the optical disc progresses slowly. In addition, the composition is not deformed, and this shifts. The value set in the DVD according to its specifications is not clear if it is not used within the specified range. / / The purpose of the present invention is to provide light. Uneven hardening

| I〜丨 —-一·^,…一,、L .- 。 圓 L .L 1 !方法中被視為問題之來自 \Λ光碟之變形。 [發明之掲示] 本發明人等進行用以解 之發現。亦卽,在將正離 在光碟基板再進行紫外線 的紫外線會照射到光碟基 射正離子型紫外線硬化性 板。亦即,使紫外線不會 碟.碁癖Λ對光碟基板之此種不 同DVD之厚度0.6 ιαιπ之厚度較 紫外線光源之燈之熱很容易引 線硬化性組成物之硬化會由於 影響重昼。因此,重叠後之突 離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之 需要使正離子型紫外線硬化性 2 Η之光碟基板不會相對的偏 要求其光碟之彎曲角度要在指 何裝置將彎曲角度有效的收納 一定可以。 碟之製造裝置,即使在使用有 成物之情況時,亦可以H造很 ______一.一 一… ” 抑制之光碟,和可以防止習知 燈之傳導熱或輻射熱而造成之 決上逑問題之檢討時獲得以下 子型紫外線硬化性組成物塗布 照射之習知方法中,不可避免 板,所以檢討預先以紫外線照 組成物後再將其塗布在光碟基 照射在光碟基板,或是即使照 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4^〇952| I ~ 丨 —-One · ^, ... One, L .-. The circle L .L 1! Method is regarded as a problem from the deformation of the \ Λ disc. [Indication of Invention] The present inventors made a discovery. In addition, the ultraviolet rays that are directly separated from the substrate of the optical disc and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays are irradiated to the optical disc-based positive ion-type ultraviolet curable plate. That is to say, the ultraviolet ray does not make the disc. The thickness of the different DVDs on the disc substrate is 0.6 ιαιπ thicker than the heat of the lamp of the ultraviolet light source, which can easily lead to hardening of the hardenable composition due to the effects of heavy weather. Therefore, the superimposed UV-curable composition needs to be positive UV-curable. The substrate of the optical disc will not be relatively biased. It is required that the bending angle of the optical disc be stored in a certain way. can. The device for making discs can make ______ one. One one ... ”even when there are products in use, and it can prevent the conduction and radiant heat caused by conventional lamps. In the review of the problem, in the conventional method of obtaining and applying the following sub-type UV-curable composition coating and irradiation, the board is unavoidable, so review the composition in advance with ultraviolet light and then coat it on the optical disc base and irradiate the optical disc substrate, or This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 4 ^ 〇952

先碟 預光 線在 外布 紫塗 以其 以將 可再 現後 發物 此成 因組 ,性 鎏化 影硬 之線 熱外 到紫 受型 會子 不離 亦正 C 時射板 射照基 子落 離在 正是 射論 照結 線之 外得 紫獲 以所 ,法 前方 之體 板具 基之 碟物 光成 到組 布性 塗化 在硬 ,線 外外 另紫 型 空組 之性 前化 板硬 基線 碟外 光紫 達型 到子 物離 成正 組使 性如 化假 辟 , 線即 外亦 紫 〇 型線 子外 離紫 正射 之照 下間 照 線 外 紫 之 夠 足 有 具 保 確 以 可 時 小 變 徑 路 下 落 之。 物量 成射The pre-disc's pre-light is painted with purple on the outer cloth to make it a reproducible post-generative group. The sexual heat is hard to the outside, and the purple light will not leave, but when the C shoots, the base will fall away. It is based on the fact that the purple is obtained outside the knot line. The front plate of the body plate in front of the France is lightly coated and hardened. The outside of the line is the hard front plate of the purple front group. Outer light purple type to sub-objects are separated into positive groups to make sex as false as possible. The line is outside and also purple. The type of line is outside the purple orthographic light. The light under the line is sufficient to ensure that the time is small. Falling on the reducing path. Quantity

述紫之 上型下 現子落 實離嘴 來正噴 用出從 現噴在 發來, 之用置 上,裝 以嘴射 據噴照 根:線 置 J外 裝備^紫 造具(; 製是〃物 碟徵一成 光一特/組 之¾、性 明 V 化 發法硬 本方線 外 來下 用落 間之 期板 之基 板碟 基光 碟 Η 光 2 達使 到來 物用 成 , 組置 性裝 化叠 硬重 線和 外 ; 紫線 型外 子紫 離射 正照 的 對 面 相 互 為 成 面 之 物 成 組 性 化 硬 〇 線碟 Lr t 夕" 紫之 型M 子 1 離為 正成 該叠 有、重 域一 區中 出器 取持 板保 基碟 碟光 光之 :板 有基 備碟 具 Η 是多 徽持 特保 之態 體狀 全層 置積 裝以 ,從 外來 另用 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項^寫本頁) 裝 訂: 線, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 嘴經 噴板 該基 有碟 備光 具 Η , 2 域之 區出 成取 製被 碟使 光來 ; 用 板 , 基置 碟裝 光射 之照 片線 一 外 出線 取該 次和 碟層 光積 之碟 片光 1 和 為 ·, 成碟 合光 貼之 物得 成獲 組所 性査 化撿 硬來 線用 外 , 紫域 型區 子査 離檢 正碟 該光 由 ; 〇 以 器以 持可 保下 碟落 光之 該物 在成 層組 積性 碟化 光硬 之線 後外 査紫 撿型 成子 完離 使正 來該 用 , ,中 域其 區 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(心) 滴下進行,或是以連績流下(成絲狀落下)進行。 在此種裝置中,因為於事前對正離子型紫外線硬化性 組成物照射紫外線,然後在光碟基板進行展延,所以可 以獲得沒有空氣捲入而且沒有硬化不均之光碟。亦即, 假如在從噴嘴落下到光碟基板之期間照射紫外線時,因 為紫外線可以均一的照射到内部,所以不會有如同旋轉 塗膜法之使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物落下之環狀之 方法中所産生之硬化不均,具有防止氣泡捲入之效果。 另外,因為不是以紫外線直接照射光碟基板之表面的進 行貼合,可以避免貼合後之光碟之變形。 在本發中「使用正離子型紫外線硬化性樹脂(環氧樹 脂)和正離子^聚合型光開始劑構成之正離子型紫外線硬 奸…― 一W. 4 - I, ..... : 扣性組合物。該組成物與通之紫外線照射之同時硬化程 度實質上就立即飽和(即時硬化之即效性)之紫外線硬化 性組成物不同,在紫外線照射後硬化程度不是立即飽和 ,經過指定之時間後硬化程度才實質上的飽和(稱為遲 效性)。亦即,從紫外線照射起到硬化程度飽和需要某 種程度之時間(具有適用期ί。包含有正離子型紫外線硬 化性樹脂和正離子聚合型光開始劑之必需成分之正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物,為著易於落下到光碟基板,所 以最好成為實質上無溶媒之液狀。最好選擇可以使組成 物本身和其硬化後之接著層均成為透明之成分。 組成物之粘度通常在25°C2為50〜lDOQOmPas,最好為 1 0 0〜1 Q G Q is P a s 。另外,從紫外線照射結束到硬化程度 -8 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) F*裝The above-mentioned model of the upper and lower part of the purple implements the spray from the mouth to spray directly from the current spray, put it on, install it with the mouth to shoot according to the root: line J external equipment ^ purple manufacturing tool (; system is 〃 物 盘 征 一 成 光 一 特 / group of ¾, sexual bright V chemical hair method hard local square external use of intervening period plate substrate disc base disc Η Light 2 to make the arrival of the object, set the sexual equipment The superposition of the hard heavy line and the outer; the opposite side of the purple line-shaped purple sub-radiation frontal is a group of solid objects. The linear disk Lr t Xi " The purple type M sub 1 is the normal, The middle area of the heavy area is taken out of the plate by the board to protect the base plate. The plate is equipped with a base plate. It is a multi-layered special protection body with a full-layer build-up, and it is used from outside (please read first Note on the back? Matters ^ write this page) Binding: Thread, printed by the consumer co-operative society of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed on the nozzle, the base is equipped with a disk with optical disks, and the output of the 2 domains is made by the disks. Come; use the board and the base plate to install the light photo line and take it out. The layered light product of the disc light 1 and is, the contents of the disc and the light paste can be obtained by the organization to find out the hard to use the line, the purple domain-type sub-division to check the disc to check the light source; 〇 to The device can be used to protect the disc from falling light. After the layered and integrated disc is hardened, the external inspection of the purple pick-up type is complete, so that it should be used. The paper size of the central region is applicable to Chinese national standards. (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (heart) Dropwise, or by continuous flow (filament). In such a device, since a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays beforehand, and then is stretched on the disc substrate, it is possible to obtain a disc with no air entanglement and no unevenness in curing. When the ultraviolet rays are irradiated while being dropped on the disc substrate, since the ultraviolet rays can be uniformly irradiated to the inside, there is no loop that causes the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition to fall like the spin coating method. The non-uniform hardening produced in this method has the effect of preventing air bubbles from being drawn in. In addition, because the surface of the optical disc substrate is not directly irradiated with ultraviolet rays, the deformation of the optical disc after bonding can be avoided. "Positive UV curing agent using positive ion-type ultraviolet curable resin (epoxy resin) and positive ion polymerization light starter ...-I. W. 4-I, .....: Button composition. This composition is different from a UV-curable composition that is substantially saturated immediately when UV radiation is applied (immediate curing is immediate). The curing degree is not immediately saturated after UV irradiation, and the curing degree is after a specified time. It is essentially saturated (known as delayed effect). That is, it takes a certain amount of time for the degree of hardening to be saturated from ultraviolet irradiation (there is an expiration date.) The positive ion ultraviolet curable composition containing the essential components of the positive ion ultraviolet curable resin and the positive ion polymerization light starter Since it is easy to drop onto the disc substrate, it is best to be a liquid that is substantially solvent-free. It is best to choose a component that can make the composition itself and the hardened adhesive layer transparent. The viscosity of the composition is usually 25 ° C2 is 50 ~ lDOQOmPas, preferably 1 0 0 ~ 1 QGQ is P as. In addition, from the end of ultraviolet irradiation to the degree of hardening -8-(Please read the precautions on the back to write this page) F * pack

-. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_ 五、發明說明()) 成為飽和之時間和飽和硬化度之絶對值,可以利用正離 子型紫外線硬化性樹脂,和與該樹脂併用之正離子聚合 型光開始劑之種類和其重量比例來加以調整,例如調節 成為3〜30分,較好為5〜25分,更好為5〜15分,最好 為5〜1 0分。 作為正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物者可以使用習知之 所有之組成物,包括含有正離子聚合型之光開始劑之環 氧樹脂。正離子聚合型光開始劑可以使用#鹽,碘錙鹽 和重氮鐯鹽。......... v〆一〆'.… .' f/碘鐲鹽之1實例如下所示。j 包含=苯碘鎖六ϋ化物,二苯碘鐲六氟銻化物,二 苯碘鐲四氟硼酸鹽,二苯碘錙四(五氟苯)硼酸鹽,雙 (十二苯)碘鐲六氟磷化物,雙(十二苯)碘鎖六氟銻化物 ,雙(十二苯)碘鐲四氟硼酸鹽,雙(十二苯)碘錙四(五 氟苯)硼酸鹽,4-甲苯- 4- (1-甲基乙基)苯碘錙六氟磷 化物,4-甲苯- 4- (1-甲基乙基)苯碘錙六氟銻化物, 4-甲苯- 4- (1-甲基乙基)苯碘鐲四氟磷化物,4-甲苯 -4-(1-甲基乙基)苯碘鎭四(五氟苯)硼酸鹽等。 環氧樹脂可以使用雙酚環氣氯丙烷型,脂環式璟氧, 長鏈脂肪族型,溴化環氧樹脂,縮水甘油酸酯型,縮水 甘油醚型,多璟式糸等各種之任何一種。較佳之具體例 有大日本油墨化學工業公司製之葉匹克龍850S,那克解 化成工業公司製之得克那路EX-313,314,321,421, 5 12, 52 1等。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 乂—!,丨-------·!裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·. 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(# 該璟氣樹脂可以使用用以獲得DVD- RAM者,由不會反 之之最 層子 , 錄離下 記氯以 訊和% 資氯量 止由重 防自 1 的之在 力離量 極游之 以用氯 可使。 ,好者 成最零 形,近 膜質接 屬變很 金而或 之間零 線時為 外長率 紫經有 射因含-. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7_ 5. Description of the invention ()) The time when it becomes saturated and the degree of saturation hardening The absolute value can be adjusted by using the type and weight ratio of the positive ion type ultraviolet curable resin, the positive ion polymerization type photoinitiator used in combination with the resin, for example, 3 to 30 minutes, preferably 5 to 25 Points, more preferably 5 to 15 points, and most preferably 5 to 10 points. As the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition, all conventionally known compositions can be used, including an epoxy resin containing a positive ion polymerization type photoinitiator. As the cationic polymerization type photoinitiator, # salt, iodonium salt and diazonium salt can be used. ......... v〆 一 〆 '.....' f / Iodine bracelet salt 1 example is shown below. j Contains: phenyliodine hexafluoride, diphenyliodine bracelet hexafluoroantimonide, diphenyliodine tetrafluoroborate, diphenyliodine tetrakis (pentafluorobenzene) borate, bis (dodecyl) iodine bracelet six Fluorophosphide, bis (dodecyl) iodine hexafluoroantimonide, bis (dodecyl) iodine bracelet tetrafluoroborate, bis (dodecyl) iodonium tetrakis (pentafluorobenzene) borate, 4-toluene -4- (1-methylethyl) phenyliodonium hexafluorophosphide, 4-toluene- 4- (1-methylethyl) phenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonide, 4-toluene 4- (1- Methyl ethyl) phenyliodine bracelet tetrafluorophosphide, 4-toluene-4- (1-methylethyl) phenyliodine tetrakis (pentafluorobenzene) borate, etc. The epoxy resin can be any of bisphenol ring gas chloropropane type, alicyclic fluorene type, long chain aliphatic type, brominated epoxy resin, glycidate type, glycidyl ether type, polyfluorene type, etc. One. Preferable specific examples are Yepicron 850S, manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and Teknox EX-313, 314, 321, 421, 5 12, 52 1 produced by Nak Chemical Co., Ltd. and the like. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 乂 —! 、 丨 ------- !! Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ·. 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (# This gas resin can be used to obtain DVD- For those with RAM, the highest level will not be reversed. Record the chlorine and the chlorine content below to prevent the onset of the strongest from 1. The amount of chlorine can be moved with chlorine. The best is zero. Shape, near the membranous texture is very gold and when the zero line is between the external length rate

下 以 % 量 lgll S 劑 始 開 光 型 合 聚 子 tttt- 離 正 和 脂 樹 性 化 0C 硬 線 外 紫 型 子 ο 離 為正 好 擇 選 式 方 逑 上 據10 根角 以脂 可樹 例性 比化 合硬 聚線 之外 時 份 部 量 ihn 二 3 份 部 量 ί 通 用 使 紫部 型量 F E 2 離 2 正 ~ 是.1 常3 紫 近 接 之 帶 長 波 之 源 光 線 外 紫 用 利 效 5 -~ 有 2 更 0.著 為為 好 , 最外 , 另 份 増基 光甲 之基 用苄 慣 , 知嗪 習噻 用吩 併 , 以憩 可用 ,使 長以 波可 之劑 域感 區增 視光 可之 和時 域這 區 ❶ 線劑 外感 性 化 硬 線 外 紫 型 子 離 〇 正 等之 酮下 乙落 苯嘴 和噴 ,從 酮射 甲照 苯線 二外 ,紫 醇以 縮當 酮 物使 成以 組可 性源 化光 硬之 線射 外照 紫線 型外 子紫 離, 正置 之裝 下射 落照 在線 以外 可紫 ,置 時設 物方 成 側 組之 低 燈 i 水 壓 高 燈 素 鹵 屬 金 J ο 燈燈 銀之 水知 氣習 氙之 ,等 燈燈 氣銀 氙水 用壓 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 訂· _ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 的子 一 離 均正 更之 物下 成落 組使 性來 化用 線變 外徑 紫直 型嘴 子噴 離俣 正以 之可 下 , 落線 對外 著紫 為射 照 下射 落照 從的 以效 可有 , 圍 外周 另體 〇 全 小之 變物 徑成 直組 之性 物化 成硬 組線 二二 LT 性夕 化紫 硬型 線子 ΙΓ 鞋 夕 闯 紫正 型之 體線 全外 之紫 物型 成子 性正 化之 硬下 線落 外在 紫是 型段 子手 離體 正具 之之 下線 落外 從紫 〇 射 線照 外圍 紫周 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_ 五、發明說明(9 ) 硬化性組成物之周圍配置多個紫外線照射裝置,用來照 射紫外線,但是假如利用反射板用來包圍落下之正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物之周圍,對該被包圍之内部照射 紫外線時,因為不需要準備多個之紫外線照射裝置,所 以可以節省能量和節省空間。 當以紫外線照射落下之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 時,紫外線會照射到噴嘴之吐出開口,這時正離子型紫 外線硬化性組成物會在吐出開口硬化,其結果是會造成 吐出量之減少和吐出開口之閉塞等之問題。為著防止此 種問題,在本發明之裝置中以紫外線曝光防止蓋用來保 護吐出開口。該紫外線曝光防止蓋不一定要覆蓋在吐出 開口之全體周邊,只要能夠達到保護吐出開口使其不會 受到紫外線照射之目的,其形狀可以任意選擇。 正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之從噴嘴到光碟基板之 落下中之對該組成物之紫外線照射光量通常是50〜500 fflJ/cm2 ,最好為 100〜400mJ/cm2 。 由正離子型紫外線硬化性樹脂和正離子聚合型光開始 劑構成之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之接著層(硬化 後)之全體厚度並没有待別之限制,通常為 最好為20〜55# m。 另外,使2片之光碟基板其間介入正離子型紫外線硬 化性組成物之貼合最好採用下面所述之方法。亦即,在 一方之光碟基板上塗布被預先以紫外線照射過之正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物使其成為環狀,然後在使另外之 -1 1 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·.The light-weight agglomerates tttt- Lizheng and Lithospermum 0C hard-wired outer purple type were started with the amount of lgll S agent in%. Liquor was just the right choice. According to the 10 corners, Lithospermum is typically harder than the compound. Outside the polyline, the amount of parts ihn 2 3 parts of the amount 通用 General make the purple part type FE 2 away from 2 positive ~ yes. 1 often 3 purple close to the source with a long wave of light outside the purple effect 5-~ there are 2 More 0. It ’s better, the outermost, the other fluorenyl photomethyl group is benzyl, and the hydrazine and thiophene are used for relaxation, so that the sensory area of the agent can be increased. In the time domain, the external sensitization of the thread-strengthening hard-line outer purple type ion is acetone and sprayed under the same ketone. From the ketone to the benzene line, the purple alcohol is made into ketal. The group can be sourced with a hard and hard line to shoot the external photo of the purple line. The external photo is purple, and the upside-down shot can be purple outside the line. Set the object side to the low light of the side group i. Water pressure high light halogen halogen Gold J ο Lights, lights, silver, water, knowledge, gas, xenon, etc. Lamp gas silver xenon water pressure (please read the precautions on the back to write this page) Order _ Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The linear change outer diameter purple straight mouth can be sprayed away from the 俣, and the falling line can be used to shoot the purple light. The surrounding circumference is different. The small diameter of the changeable body is formed into a straight group. Sexual material is transformed into a hard set of two LT. Sexualized purple is a hard type thread. Γ Shoe is broken into a purple positive type body line. The entire purple material type is formed into a rigid positive line. The bottom line of the paper falls from the purple ray to the periphery of the purple week. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7_ V. Invention Explanation (9) A plurality of ultraviolet irradiation devices are arranged around the curable composition to irradiate ultraviolet rays, but if a reflecting plate is used to surround the surroundings of the falling positive ion ultraviolet curable composition, When the interior is surrounded by the irradiation with ultraviolet rays, since ultraviolet light irradiation apparatus not necessary to prepare a plurality of, and the energy can be saved in order to save space. When the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition falling down is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, the ultraviolet rays will be irradiated to the discharge opening of the nozzle. At this time, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition will be hardened at the discharge opening. As a result, the amount of discharge will be reduced and Problems such as occlusion of the spout. To prevent such problems, an ultraviolet exposure prevention cover is used in the apparatus of the present invention to protect the spit opening. The ultraviolet exposure prevention cover need not necessarily cover the entire periphery of the discharge opening, and its shape can be arbitrarily selected as long as it can achieve the purpose of protecting the discharge opening from ultraviolet radiation. The amount of ultraviolet light irradiating the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition from the nozzle to the disc substrate is usually 50 to 500 fflJ / cm2, and preferably 100 to 400 mJ / cm2. The total thickness of the adhesive layer (after curing) of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition composed of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable resin and the positive ion polymerization type photoinitiator is not subject to any other limitation, and is usually preferably 20 to 55. # m. In addition, it is preferable to use a method described below for bonding the two disc substrates with a positive ion ultraviolet curing composition interposed therebetween. That is, one positive disc substrate is coated with a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition that has been irradiated with ultraviolet rays in advance to make it ring-shaped, and the other -1 1-This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ·.

470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(π ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 光碟基板重叠時,不是使該2片之光碟基板從最初平行 的重叠,而是最初以傾斜狀態重昼,然後逐漸的使該2 片之光碟基板接近至所希望之距離,成為平行狀態。 利用這種方式,當與2片光碟基板最初為平行狀態之 重叠方法比較時,可以減少氣泡之捲入。另外,當使2 Η光碟基板間之間隙變小時,可以控制成以微單位在1 秒鐘接近,和進行間歇式之接近。 另外j在本發明中,作為貼合對象之光碟基板由紫外 線不容易透過或實質上不能透過之材料構成。S外,不 v- J.. .. .. ----- ... 只限於以單一材料構成,亦可以由紫外線可以充分透過 之材料和紫外線不容易透過或實質上不能透過之材料之 複合材料構成。其一實例是DVD- ROM中之具有上逑Α1等 之金屬膜較厚之DVD-10, DVD-18,或DVD-RAM。 線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在DVD- ROM之情況時,該2片光碟基板之至少之一方 在紫外線透過性基板上具有資訊記錄層,另外一方之光 碟基板可以具有或未具有資訊記錄層。亦即本發明之作 為對象之光碟可以是2 Η光碟基板均具有資訊記錄層, 亦可以是一方之光碟基板具有資訊記錄層,另外一方之 光碟基板未具有資訊記錄層。在任何一種情況其光碟基 板通常具有〇 . 3〜lmni之厚度。 光碟基板可以使用習知慣用之任何一種材料,例如丙 烯酸,聚磺酸酯,非品形聚烯烴等之耐熱性可塑性合成 樹脂。資訊記錄層之構成是在該基板之一面設置與記錄 資訊對應之凹凸,再在其上積層金屬膜。 -1 2-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(II ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在本發明中,可以在代表半反射膜或反射膜之金屬膜 ,直接塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物和使其進行展 延,但是例如在上逑之金靥膜,以可以極力防止金屬膜 之經長時間而變質之方式,使被調整過之習知之紫外線 硬化性組成物進行展延和硬化,在由其硬化物形成之保 護層上,塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物,使其進行 展延和硬化。該保護層全體可以形成5〜20^111。在這種 情況,第1和第2光硬基板之兩個保護層之間以正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物接著。 該金屬膜最好是可以以高效率反射用以讀取記錄資訊 所採用之可視光線,藉以確實的確認上逑之凹凸。以高 效率反射可視光線之皮膜一般亦以高效率反射紫外線。470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (π) (Please read the notes on the back to write this page first) When the disc substrates are overlapped, the two disc substrates are not overlapped from the first parallel, but they are tilted for the first time. Then gradually bring the two disc substrates closer to the desired distance and become parallel. In this way, it is possible to reduce the entanglement of air bubbles when compared with the overlapping method where the two disc substrates are initially parallel. In addition, when the gap between the 2Η disc substrates is made small, it can be controlled to approach in microseconds in 1 second, and to perform intermittent approach. In addition, in the present invention, the disc substrate to be bonded is made of a material that is not easily or substantially impervious to ultraviolet rays. Besides S, not v- J .. .. .. ----- ... It is only limited to be composed of a single material, and can also be made of materials that can fully transmit ultraviolet rays and materials that are not easily or substantially impervious to ultraviolet rays. Composite material composition. One example is DVD-10, DVD-18, or DVD-RAM, which has a thicker metal film such as 逑 A1 in DVD-ROM. When printed on a DVD-ROM by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, at least one of the two disc substrates has an information recording layer on the ultraviolet-transparent substrate, and the other disc substrate may or may not have Information logging layer. That is, the optical disc as the object of the present invention may be a 2Η disc substrate having an information recording layer, or one disc substrate having an information recording layer, and the other disc substrate having no information recording layer. In either case, the disc substrate usually has a thickness of 0.3 to lmni. The optical disc substrate may be made of any conventional material, such as heat-resistant plastic synthetic resins such as acrylic acid, polysulfonic acid ester, and non-shaped polyolefin. The information recording layer is structured such that unevenness corresponding to recorded information is provided on one side of the substrate, and a metal film is laminated thereon. -1 2- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (II) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) In this invention It is possible to directly coat and stretch the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition on a metal film representing a semi-reflective film or a reflective film, but for example, a gold film on the upper surface can prevent the metal film from growing In a time-deteriorating manner, the conventional ultraviolet curable composition that has been adjusted is stretched and hardened, and a protective layer formed of the cured product is coated with a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition and extended. And hardened. The entire protective layer can be formed to 5 to 20 ^ 111. In this case, the two protective layers of the first and second optical hard substrates are bonded with a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition. The metal film preferably reflects the visible light used to read the recorded information with high efficiency, so as to confirm the unevenness of the upper part. Films that reflect visible light with high efficiency generally also reflect ultraviolet light with high efficiency.

該金屬膜可以使用Al, Ni,或該等之合金等,可視光 反射率為8 ϋ〜1 0 ϋ %,和涵蓋紫外線全波長頻帶之其透過率為 超過〇 %小於1 G %,最好能滿足超過〇 %小於0 . 5 %之條 件。3外,在被稱為DVD-9 ,DVD-18之規格之光碟中, 最好形成有被稱為半反射膜之由光透過率為70〜82%之 材料(例如金)製成之膜。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 DVD- RAM具有與以上DVD不同之特徴之層構造。其一 實例之構造是使用2 Η之光碟基板,其中在聚磺酸酯製 之基板上順序的積層ZnS-Si02層,GeSbTe層,ZnS-Si02 層,A 1合金層,和保護層,使保護層間互相面對,以接 著劑進行硬化和阽合。 在該製造裝置中當貼合光碟基板時,對外該2種之光 -1 3-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 基層 碟積 光以 ,是 時常 這通 ο , 片題 一 問 出之 取等 次上 一 間 所空 場之 管線 保産 従生 要之 需際 ,實 板於 基由 碟板 薄之 很等 度力 厚電 層靜 積或 當力 且著 而吸 ,空 潸真 平生 面産 表易 之容 板間 基之 碟碟 光光 ο 1 管時 保體 態物 狀之 Η 有 一 著 出附 取以 次為 一 因 要 , 使板 即基 ,碟 時光 力之 著象 附對 種出 此取 有在 在 , 存時 當板 〇 基 力碟 著光 附之 出 取 次 1 是 ΒΚ 結 其 出 取 行 。 進板 態基 狀碟 之光 板之 基上 碟以 光 Η 之 2 他或 其片 出 Η 取 2 只出 次取 一 止 面防 表著 之為 體 , 物時 狀況 板情 之之 等程 板工 基個 碟一 光下 有到 層蓮 積搬 從將 在 Η 是 法 方 之 用 採 一所 物去 隔除 間以 入藉 插氣 先空 預化 間子 體離 物出 狀吹 板面 之側 象層 對積 之之 工體 加物 為狀 作板 在從 隔 間 小 之 用 離 隔 之 狀 形 定 預 入 二m 插 間 體 物 狀 板 之(1 層逑 C 積上 電在之 靜 物 和 力 著 附 之 生 産 所 力 IpQT 靜 於 由 中 法 方 之 2 成 出與 取要 次需 一 僅 止不 防 , 的時 實況 確 情 以之 可物 ,隔 小間 減種 的此 幅入 大插 被在 力 , 著是 吸但 空 。 真片 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 插著 有顯 要量 需産 且生 而使 , 會 物等 隔該 間 , 之置 目裝 數去 同除 相其 數將 體和 物置 狀裝 板之 之物 象隔 對間 為入 情 之 氣 空 化 子 吹 面 側 從 在 式 方 之 \ty 2 /—, 述 上 O J 低外 降另 的 化電 子靜 離之 給間 供體 ,物 隙狀 間板 之小 撤減 稍用 之作 間和 體中 物之 狀子 板離 之用 層利 積以 從可 時氣 況空 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β 滑著用 很吸作 面空和 表真中 之是子 體或離 物,生 狀時産 板況會 ,情不 是之亦 但隔氣 。間空 Η 有化 2 没子 出似離 取近吹 次面使 一 側即 止之 , 防層時 以積強 藉在很 1 , 力 況源 情給 之供 氣之 空氣 化空 子縮 離壓 吹和 在置 ,裝 且生 而産 。氣 果空 效化 之子 實離 確之 得貴 獲昂 能要 不需 , 時 成 建 構 0 好 升最 上 , 本中 成置 品裝 製之 使明 而發 因本 加之 增題 本問 成述 備上 設決 産解 生以 使用 會在 最來 使用 中 , 板置 基裝 碟持 光保 之板 片基 多碟 層光 積層 在表 , 最 置 ·, 裝性 加彈 施有 性具 彈片 :一 有之 備層 具表 碟片最 光一在 之之著 他層附 其表 , 離最時 引該性 其之彈 將離生 ,引産 片被片 1 I 1 0 1 之搬之 層來層 表用表 最 ,最 該置當 之裝中 態蓮置 狀搬裝 Ξ 性 和種 彈 ·,此 持板在 保基 用施 利 , 〇 體 性物 彈狀 生板 産之 的側 樣下 同之 體,之 物層 狀表 板最 之在 側著 下附 之對 Η , 一 式 之方 層種 表這 最附 與和 在片 加一 施之 於層 大表 力最 元除 復消 該就 當 , , 時 力力 元著 復附 之之 性間 彈之 除片 消一 以之 用層 加表 體持 物維 狀片 板一 之之 側層 下表 使 最 來 , 用況 , 情 著種 附這 之在 體 。 物狀 狀形 板之 之來 側原 下為 其成 在元 著復 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線‘ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 另除 〇 消 著的 附實 再確 之更 Η 以 一 可 之 , 層時 表形 最變 止性 防彈 以該 可之 ,次 時多 離生 引産 被如 的假 性 , Bp ft 彈夕 産式 在械 έύ ,機 外到 0 受 。份 箸部 附一 之之 體片 物一 狀之 板層 之表 側最 下使 其以 與可 Η 亦 一 , 之時 層性 表彈 最生 載以 負可 , 則 況 , 情時 這部 在一 。之 載層 負表 加最 施箸 被吸 份空 部真 一 以 之如 他假 其法 ,方 制加 限施 之之The metal film can be made of Al, Ni, or an alloy thereof, and has a visible light reflectance of 8 ϋ to 10 ϋ%, and a transmittance of more than 0% and less than 1 G% covering the entire wavelength band of ultraviolet rays, preferably Can meet the conditions of more than 0% and less than 0.5%. 3. In addition, in the optical discs with the specifications called DVD-9 and DVD-18, it is best to form a film called a semi-reflective film made of a material with a light transmittance of 70 to 82% (such as gold). . The DVD-RAM printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has a unique layer structure different from the above DVDs. The structure of one example is to use a 2-mm optical disc substrate, in which a ZnS-Si02 layer, a GeSbTe layer, a ZnS-Si02 layer, an A 1 alloy layer, and a protective layer are sequentially laminated on a substrate made of polysulfonate to protect the substrate. The layers face each other with an adhesive for hardening and bonding. When the substrate of the optical disc is bonded in this manufacturing device, the two kinds of light are externally 1-3. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (base layer The disc is light, which is often the same. When the title of the film is asked, the pipeline of the previous empty field is required to maintain the production and production requirements. The solid plate is thin and the plate is very thin. The electric layer is static accumulation or when the force is on, it is sucked, and the surface of the surface is easy to produce. The surface of the plate is based on the surface of the plate. The tube is kept in a physical shape when there is a tube. It is necessary to make the board as the base, and the optical power of the disk is attached to the seed, and the existence of the power is present. When the board is stored, the base power of the disk is attached to the light. The plate on the base of the light plate of the shape of the plate is made of 2 or other pieces of light. Take 2 pieces at a time and take only one surface to prevent the appearance. The time is the same as the plate. Under the light, there is a layer of lotus roots that will be moved from here. An object is removed from the compartment by inserting and inserting the air to pre-empt the space between the body and the object. The side image layer on the side of the blower surface is the same as the working body addition. The plate is used to separate the compartment from the small one. The shape is pre-loaded into the two-m interposer object-shaped plate (1 layer of 逑 C product on the still life and power attached to the production force IpQT is still required by the Chinese and French parties. Not only can you prevent it, the real situation can be used as a real thing, and this large cut in the cubicle is being inserted, but it is sucking but empty. Real film (please read the precautions on the back to write this page) Economy The Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperative Cooperative printed a significant amount of production and was created. The meeting room is separated by the number of items and the number of objects is divided by the number of objects. The opposite side is the aura of cavitation. The side of the air cavitation blows from \ ty 2 / — in the above formula, as mentioned above, the OJ low external electrons are ionized to the donor, and the gap-like spacer is removed. Less-used intermediary and in-body-like objects The layered product is used to apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) from the time-available space-free paper scale. 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β sliding is used to absorb surface space and tables. The true one is a daughter or a distant object, and the condition of the production plate will be when it is born. Space Η 有 化 2 No son appears as close to the blowing surface so that one side stops. The defense layer is borrowed at a high strength of 1. The air-borne cavities that are supplied to the gas source are compressed and blown. And in the home, installed and born. The son of air fruiting is really expensive, it ’s not necessary, it ’s not necessary, it ’s time to build it, it ’s good, it ’s the best, it ’s made up of this product. It is assumed that the final product will be used in the most recent use. The board is installed on a plate, the plate is held by a multi-disc layer, and the light is laminated on the table. The preparation layer has the most polished work of the table disc. The other layers are attached to the table. When the time is up, the bullet will be released, and the induced film will be used for the layer 1 1 1 1 The table is the most suitable, and it should be installed in the middle state. It is the same type as the side of the body. The most layered surface of the object is attached to the side facing the opposite, a square-layered type table is the most appropriate and added to the film to apply a large force to the layer, it should be eliminated, The elimination of the interstitial bombs, supplemented by Shi Lili Yuan, is used to add the layer and the surface of the body. A lower layer side of the board table to make the most, with the case, the case in which the species attached to the body. The original shape of the object-shaped plate is the original copy of it (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). The line is printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. It ’s more true. One thing is right. The surface is most changeable when it ’s layered. The bulletproof is what it should be. The next time it ’s fake, it ’s fake. The Bp ft production style is in the machine, outside the machine. To 0 by. The body side of the body sheet attached to the part of the crotch is the lowest on the surface side, so that the layered surface bullet is most negatively loaded. In this case, the part is . The negative layer of the carrier layer plus the most effective part of the sucked part is the same as if it were faked by others, and it is restricted by the system.

5 1X 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(K ) 防止使板狀物體之表面受傷。 如此一來,不需要使用間隔物或吹離子化空氣等之手 段就可以確實而且廉價的引離積層之板狀物體中之最表 層之一 Η和對其進行搬蓮。 另外,在該製造裝置中,在介入正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物使2片之光碟基板重壘之後,因為在硬化之過 程中不會産生變形,偏移,所以下面所述者非常重要。 亦即,在2 Η之光碟基板間之全面使正離子型紫外線硬 化性組成物進行過渡之狀態,亦即在展延完成之狀態, 當産生變形,偏移時,即使在正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物之完全硬化前,要消除其變形,偏移亦極困難,在 硬化後在光碟會産生很大之彎曲角。因此,最好之措施 是在一方之光碟基板塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 ,使另外一方之光磲基板重叠後,正離子型紫外線硬化 性組合物在2片之光碟間之全面進行展延,在這期間不會 産生變形,偏移。在DVD之製造之情況時,光碟基板因 至 薄 為 以 所 成 構 醋 酸 聚 之 低 較 性 剛 由 且 而 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 形 , 所 面 件 坦 構 平 之 置 形 靜 變 有 而 備 量 具 重 是 之 擻 身。待 本程之 為工明 因延發 會 展本 不行之 性進現 剛上發 有面種 具坦此 在平據 要之根 需成 片之 2 物 該成 之組 叠性 WL· /1 所硬 置線 裝外 叠紫 重型 該子 用離 利正 在該 以行 藉進 碟間 光之 載板 裝基 C 來碟延 用光展 之 際 實 在 要 是 但 易 容 常 非 身 本 面 坦 平 置 靜 I 種 此 備 準5 1X This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (K) Prevent the surface of the board from being injured. In this way, without using spacers or blowing ionized air, it is possible to reliably and inexpensively remove one of the outermost layers of the laminated plate-like object and move it. In addition, in this manufacturing apparatus, after the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is interposed to cause the two disc substrates to be barrierd, the following processes are very important because they do not deform or shift during the curing process. That is, the state where the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is completely transitioned between the substrates of the 2 Η disc, that is, in the state where the stretching is completed, when deformation and shift occur, even in the positive ion-type ultraviolet curing. Before the hard component is completely hardened, it is very difficult to eliminate its deformation and displacement, and a large bending angle will be generated on the optical disc after hardening. Therefore, the best measure is to apply a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition to one of the optical disc substrates and overlap the other optical substrate. Then, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is fully developed between the two optical discs. It will not deform or shift during this period. In the case of DVD manufacturing, the disc substrate is thin because it is made of acetic acid with a low structure, and it is printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. All the components are flat and flat. It is important to be prepared. When this process is due to the advancement of Gongming because of the delay of the exhibition, it has just been released. There are two kinds of things that are frankly needed to be based on the basic requirements. The stacking WL · / 1 is hard. Set the line to install the outer stack of purple heavy. The child should use the profit to borrow the light from the carrier board to install the base C to extend the light exhibition. But if it ’s easy, Yi Rongchang is not flat. This preparation

6 1X 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(^ ) 生産線之有限之空間實現會有困難。大量生産之DVD要 為角1片準備靜置之大面之靜置平坦面在現實上不可行。 DVD形成在包夾區域外周設置環狀之凸部(環狀凸部) 之型式。因為該凸部存在於DVD外面,使其積層時,因 為上下之環狀凸部之間互相接觸,所以光碟面之間不會 互相接觸。因此,在積層的進展延之期間,剛性較低之 DVD由於其本身之重量,和積層在其上之DVD之重量會 變形成傘狀,亦即産生彎曲。 DVD為未形成有凸狀環之型式,在這種情況時,不會 有由於凸狀環之存在而産生之變形。但是,假如積層之 Η數很多時,累積微小之變形,位於積層之上層之DVD 之變形會有在製品規格上不可忽視之問題。 為著在有限之空間實現靜置平坦面,所以考慮在積層 之光碟之間介入具有平坦面之剛體碟,例如由A1製成之 碟。 其中,本發明之特擻是具備有:積層裝置,用來使該 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 成載並 D 輕 成用 碟裝的DV較 達使 光碟目之量 要以 該體成層重 以可 使剛達積用 所, 在之夠將使 ,如 ,面能要好 低例 置坦要到最 較。 裝平只慮便 性厚 載有質考方 剛的 裝具材線之 其當 碟將之産蓮 料相 體來碟生搬 材要 剛用體在著 之需 和, 剛是為 小, •,中 ,但, 較時 層程外。時 重的 積過 9 制所 比目 片之 。限場 常之 多層上之他 通碟 為積碟別其 ,體 成 Η 光特到 外剛 碟多該有蓮。另為 光為在沒搬者 作 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4) 與DVD之光碟基板相同材質之聚碩酸酯。在這種情況, 需要以具有充分剛性之方式用來決定其厚度。亦可以使 用金屬材料製成剛體碟,在這種倩況時最好使用比重較 小之鋁或鈦。 在以未形成有凸狀璟之型式之DVD作為對象之情況時 ,可以使用具有單純之平面之剛體碟,但是在形成有凸 狀環之DVD之情況時,需要使剛體碟成為不會干擾該凸 狀環之形狀,例如在與環狀凸部對應之部份形成璟狀溝 。另外,平坦面之平坦度只要將彎曲收納在指定值之範 圍内,並沒有特別之限制,可以依照展延之條件等,以 實驗方式決定。另外,平坦面不一定要使其全面成為連 續之平面,只要能夠達到所希望之目的,亦可成為間歇 之平面。例如,亦可以將直徑不同環狀構件配置在同軸 上,此處所謂之平坦面亦包含此種構造之概念。 在此種裝置中,因為在靜止平坦面進行展延,所以可 以抑制彎曲之發生。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物被展延後,可以將光 碟放置至樹脂完全硬化,但是考慮到生産效率時,可以 進行搬蓮到其他場所。在展延後之短暫之期間,因為正 離子型紫外線硬化性組成物為未硬化之狀態,所以要相 當慎重的搬蓮,否則2片光碟基板會産生相對偏移。另 外,從重S體之光碟之外周端面突出之正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物形成粘粘的,因此會有作業效率不良之問 題。 -*18- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(α) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 針對此點進行檢討發現當利用具有一定以上之照度之 紫外線,對正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物進行短時間照 射時,可以大幅的促進硬化。另外,使具有一定以上之 照度之紫外線進行短時間照射之手段,確認使用閃光燈 之閃光照射非常有效。這時之紫外線照射之進行可以不 是在光碟基板表面,而是集中在外周端面。在集中至端 面進行照射之情況時,由於來自燈光源之熱而引起之不 良影繼大致沒有問題。在本發明之裝置中其特徽是具備 有第2紫外線照射裝置,用來將紫外線照射在該多Η光 碟之各個端面。利用這種方式,可以使該2個光碟基板 端面部之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物較快的硬化,可 以消除具有粘粘之問題,和可以防止搬蓮時之偏移。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 依照這種方式,以紫外線照射光碟之端面,用來使光 碟端面近傍之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物硬化時,因 為對角一片光碟進行紫外線照射,所以效率不良,因此 對於使光碟多Η積層之積層光碟之集合體,可以以紫外 線照射各個光碟之端面。利用這種方式,一次可以進行 很多Μ之光碟之端面硬化處理。另外,該多Η光碟最好 是在利用第2紫外線照射裝置之紫外線照射時,以各個 光碟之中心之連結線為軸進行旋轉,利用這種方式可以 很容易對全部光碟之端面進行均一之紫外線照射。 該第2紫外線照射裝置最好$閃光式,j對於節省能量 比較1利」 ” 上逑之效果在只有正離子聚合型開始劑時亦可發現, -19-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(J ) 但是在其中併用光增感劑時,利用其作用可以提高促進 硬化之效果。 除了上逑之照射紫外線之方法外,亦可以使用加溫到 指定溫度之方法。在這種情況,亦可以構建成具備有加 熱處理裝置用來對多片積層之光碟施加加熱處理。該加 溫之手段,當照射紫外線情況比較時,所需要之設備只 要廉價之設備即可,所以可以有效的降低生産成本。對 於加溫之溫度需要依照構成光碟基板之材料,和正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物用來適當的決定,在DVD之情況 ,當超過70 °C時光碟基板會因為熱應力而産生變形,所 以最好在7 Q °C以下。另外,為促進正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物之硬化,最好使用4 Q °C以上之加溫溫度。 加熱處理用之裝置可以使用一般之設有電熱線加熱器 之加熱器,但是考慮到加熱性能時最好使用設有鹵素加 熱器之加熱器。亦卽,當與電熱線加熱器,石英加熱器 ,陶瓷加熱器,或其他之加熱器比較時,鹵素加熱器從 加熱開始到達到所希望之溫度之時間可以縮短,所以可 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 有量使面熱有 具能要全加具 用射 ,之以 C 使放外碟在間 是的另光放時 好效。個以之 最有行各可定 ,向進將如指 者方體是例置 用個全好 ,放 通一面最此 , 之向端,因中 知朝之時。室0-。習以碟小度溫 1 理用可光變溫恆 處使器對力之之 熱以熱少極同度 加可加至曲相溫 行器素理彎到定 進熱鹵處之熱 一 的加之熱碟加在 速素膜加光的制 迅鹵射該個樣控 以反 各同器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 碟 1 者處生 α 度00在為’加 重成組 者用搬當光定 光用兩熱在 W 厚-1。 成轉 C1 制組性 用,來,片固 在使該加是 4、和 1cm離旋轉為 h 抑性化 通置用況 2 置 熱 CD 分 式只置行但D^類為 7 距不旋常05以化硬 般裝動情,裝 方以配進,力種常~之碟行通 1 可硬線 一著蓮之時著 之可式時制go之通10碟光進 ,d ,線外 是吸轉法程吸 體亦方同限 料,為光使式化為理外紫 法之旋方工被 全是之轉之 材擇好與以方硬好處紫型 方等之種射未 面但觸旋別 U 板選最其可之的最熱型子 之著臂一照 , 端,接碟特 基的看使亦觸實看加子離 碟吸用何線此 碟個不光有I/之當來以,接確來加離正。光空利任外因 光多器使没 Q 碟適點可同不面點施正成率蓮真,之紫 C 圍置熱只並20光來觀,不以端觀後之促效搬置面逑到化 ei設加,度 ~ 成用之時之面使之疊出以産,設之上蓮硬 以的和定速20構度間況況端到率重突可生中端方用搬成 以式碟固轉擇照強空情情碟行效在面和高造前一使碟完 可方光器旋選依加省之照光進産,端,提製之之在光未 器觸以熱 ^好離之節強依著是生式周的以之臂碟,之尚 熱接,加光最距器以很,沿間以方外粘藉碟在光是體劑 加不器使之面之熱,度外器時中種碟粘化光是持但一著 之,熱是時方面加圍強另熱之其這光有硬種法保。成接 性侧加好這率端及範器。加理,照在具之此方著碟合之 向外之最。效碟以之熱遠使處分依後之物在其吸光貼間 方之個,理産光 ,01|1加更只熱15疊物成 ,來蓮將碟 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(/) 之一方之光碟基板受到搬蓮時之離心力或加速度等之影 響,會有發生軸心偏移之問題。因為發生有軸心偏移之 光碟不能使用,所以成為不良品的被捨棄。 為著減小搬蓮時施加在未被固定之一方之光碟基板之 離心力或加速度等之影響,有效之方法是使搬運速度變 慢,但是會産生生産效率降低之問題。 在本發明之裝置中可以具備有:保持裝置,用來保持 光碟;同軸裝置,用來使該2片光碟基板之孔部之内壁 面位置對準;和移動裝置,用來使該保持裝置和該同軸 裝置同時移動。這時該同軸裝置最好為直徑擴大/收縮 裝置。 亦即,保持裝置用來保持阽合之光碟,同軸裝置用來 進行2 Η光碟基板之成為同軸,使其孔部之内壁面之位 置對準。在此種狀態,利用移動裝置用來使保持裝置和 同軸裝置同時移動,藉以在接著劑未硬化之階段可以進 行光碟之搬蓮,所在在迄接箸劑硬化之期間,不需要將 光碟靜置在貼合場所,可以進行有效之光碟基板之貼合 ,藉以提高光碟之生産效率。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 另外,在使2片之光碟基板之軸心成為同軸時,使用 使基板之外緣部對準之方法,和使設在基板之主面之中 心之孔部之位置對準之方法,假如是使孔部之位置對準 之方法時,則即使光碟基板之大小有變化時亦可以很容 易因應。另外,在光碟基板很薄之情況時,在位置對準 用之基板之外緣部被施加力量時,會有發生彎曲,畸變 -22-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(W ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 所行 最來推 碟 裝硬碟 態 端 ,進 上用來 光 運線光 α 形 行 小易 質關用 之 搬外到 份施 進 很容 實開放 明 之紫下 。部實 射 成很 ,之開 發 用型落 圖要一 照 變以 置爪之 本 使 子 物 大 主另 線 時可 裝數爪 示 所 離 成 擴 之之 。外 較此 縮用該 表 置 正 組 之 置置ΙΙΟ態紫 比因 收利用 來 裝 之。性。蓋 裝裝λι狀用 小, / 是利 用 造 用造化圖止 之之 W 層利 大形 大嘴以 式 製。使構硬造防 蓮蓮 Μ 積況 之變 擴夾可。 方 碟驟所之線構光。搬搬 U 之情 碟易 徑 α 是面 式 c 光步態置外略曝作之之 ^ 碟之 光容 直嘴但壁 模態之之形裝紫概線動化化 Μ 體碟 與不 用夾,内 以形圖時施射型之外昼軸軸 W 剛光 部亦 使或具之 ,施 1 板實照子置紫重同同)[和層 孔量 好部道部^]圖實第基i 下離裝和明行行(C碟積 是力 最拾之孔 P 面 1 在碟第落正之嘴説進進和光在 。 但加 置撿等之 I 平第示光示之使用噴來示示圖示示態 ,施。裝氣物板?°是之表持表物是使是用表表b)表表狀 題被準軸空作基 圖置圖把圔成圖所圖圖圖圖 〇〇 圖圖之 問使對同用 Η 碟 裝 2 ,3 組 4 時 5678 第 910理 圖 之即置該使住光 第造第中第性第板第第第第,第第處 等以位 好抓壓[^製 置 化 基 例 面 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(γ) 第11圖是概略構造圖,用來表示對光碟貼合體之端面 之紫外線照射方法之一實例。 第12圖是概略構造圖,用來表示對光碟阽合體之端面 之紫外線照射所使用之裝置。 第13圖表示實施例3之實驗結果。 第1 4圖表示實施例3和比較例之光碟外觀形狀。 第15圖表示正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之塗布裝置 之另一實例之構造。 第16圔表示實施例4之實驗結果。 第17圖表示對實施例4之比較例之實驗結果。 第18圖表示第2圖所示之搬蓮裝置之另一實例。 第19圖表示第2圔所示之搬運裝置之更另一實例。 第2G圖是平面圔,以模式方式表示本發明之光碟製造 裝置之第2實施形態。 第21圖是斜視圖,以模式方式表示第20圖之光碟製造 裝置所使用之光碟積層/分離裝置。 第22圖是立面圖,用來表示第21画之光碟積層/分離 裝置之第1搬蓮路徑。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第23圖是立面圖,用來表示第21画之光碟積層/分離 裝置之第2搬運路徑。 第24圖是平面圖,以模式方式表示本發明之光碟製造 裝置之第3實施形態。 第25圖是立面圖,以模式方式表示第24圖之光碟製造 裝置所使用之光碟之搬蓮裝置。 -24- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(一) 。置 置裝 裝載 壓移 按之 示碟 表光 式示 方表 式式 模方 以式 ,模 圖以 面, 剖圖 面面 立立 是是 圖圖 6 7 2 2 第第 態 形 施 實 之 明 1發 本 態Z , 明 之用 面 明j ^ Ϊ能心* T®® 實53實 面 爿下1 用 第 1 出積 第取碟 板光 基和 碟 , 光R3 有域 含區 包査 致檢 大碟 成光 構 , 之R2 置域 裝區 造成 MK D 碟 DV光 之 , 示 R 所域 圔區 域 區 層 在利 A1態 域狀 區之 存層 儲積 : 為 有成 含lb 包板 成基 構碟 之光 1± R 2 域第 區和 出la 取板 板基 基碟 碟光 光 1 第 0¾ £ 域 1 區板 出基 取碟 和光 •, 2 持第 保和 以 1 加第 7 之 器持 持保 保所 碟 7 〇 光器片 用持一 保出 碟取 光次 於一 對 , 具落板 ,脂基 B 樹碟 台性光 布化 1 塗硬第 :線使 有外 , 備紫 5 具型置 成子裝 構離叠 之正重 R2使和 域來; 區用la 成 4 板 製置基 碟裝碟 光射光 ,照 1 外下第 另落到 有下 第 , i a 對 1 面板 為基 成碟 面光 之 2 脂第 樹和 性 1 化第 硬之 線等 外該 紫使 型以 子藉 離 , 正lb 有板 下基 。 落碟疊 之光重 a b 1i Λζ 1± (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .裝: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 光具 1 有 第設 之Α1 〇 Α 域 程域區 Η 區存 造存儲 製儲在 D 之 〇 V 1 2 D R R 之域域 置區區 裝出成 該取製 明板碟 説基光 的碟到 略光給 概在供 將叠la 面重板 下將基 碟 積使 以 A 上域 :區 :存 , 儲 7從 7,當 器 , 持la 保板 碟基 光碟 在光 J 1X 2 第 置値 裝多 運有 搬納 之收 2 態 臂狀 備層 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4 和第 線之 實上 在 7 就器 21持 臂保 該碟 ,光 時在 A2層 域積 區將 出來 取用 到, 移搖 7 行 器進 持間 保之 碟線 光鐽 ρκ I 域種 區這 成用 0 利 碟 〇 光Β1 到置 戟 立 /If 移給 , 供 Η 之 一 上 之 3 層 4口 表轉 最旋 之之 中 Β la台 板布 基塗 碟之 光中 〇 層 2 R 積 域有 區没 成全 製完 碟 7 光器 到持 給保 供碟 la光 板之 基上 碟A2 光域 1 區 第出 將取 的在 序 , 順後 式然 方 時 a 1X 板 基 碟 光 保光 碟 1 光第 到有 動層 。 移積A2 7 的域 器新區 持使出 保A1取 碟域到 光區動 使存移 就儲 7 ,從器 和持 ,保 A3碟 域光 區之 存la 1 儲板 第器基 之持碟 光 , 1 轉 第旋 之之 B1向 置方 位頭 給箭 供之 之中 B 圖 台依 布之 塗 3 到 台 給轉 供旋 ,用 面利 方 , lla 外板 另基 碟 裝 射 照 下 落 用 利 上 a IX 板 基 碟 光 1± 。第 B2之 置 B 位置 布位 塗布 到塗 動在 移 物組進 成性向 組化方 性硬頭 化線箭 硬外之 線紫中 外型画 紫子依 型離 3 子正台 離當轉 正。旋 之布使 射塗 , 照行時 線進成 外和完 紫下布 被落塗 使狀之 ,環45 4 以物 置 4 成 置臂 位之 1 s2 搬置 到裝 動蓮 移搬 la由 板經 基 , 碟la 光板 1 基 第碟 將光 至 1 直_第 ,之 轉置 旋位 行蓮 搬被 U----^ 11------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 置 裝 〇 違 S 搬 置以 裝A4 疊域 重區 之存 C 儲 台板 疊基 重碟 之光 R2從 域待 區等 成 , 製 C 碟台 光叠 到重 WE 右 搬 態區 狀存 層儲 積板 以基 lb碟 板光 基之 碟/, 光R1 2 域 第區 該出 〇 取 lb板 板基 基碟 碟光 光於 2 位 第在 之納 來收 搬被 器把 持就 保 2 碟置 光裝 in / BE 佼 s 當搬 ,之 上21 :臂 :有 , 備 7 具 7 時 器A5 持域 保區 碟出 光取 之到 A 動 域移 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(/) 持積層在光碟保持器7上之第2光碟基板lb中之位於最 表層者,使其移動到重叠台C上。利用這種方式順序的 將第2光碟基板lb供給到重昼台C 。 然後,在取出區域A5上之光碟保持器7完全没有積層 之第2光碟基板lb時,就使光碟保持器7移動到光碟保 持器儲存區域A 6,和從光碟基板儲存區域A 4使新的積層 有第2光碟基板lb之光碟保持器7移動到取出區域A5。 在重昼台C ,利用重叠裝置5使第1光碟基板la重叠 在等待之第2光碟基板lb上。當然,2片之光碟基板經 由正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物45形成重叠。另外,重 疊所成者以下簡稱為光碟。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 光碟10經由經由同軸搬蓮裝置6沿著搬蓮路徑9被搬 蓮到設於光碟製成區域R2内之光碟積層/分離裝置D , 搬蓮至位於該光碟積層/分離裝置D之第1位置11之光 碟保持器7上。在該光碟積層/分離裝置D ,於積層有 多片光碟10之狀態進行展延處理。如前所逑,在有限之 空間實現展延處理。其中,在只積層光碟時,因為光碟 會産生變形和偏移,所以當將光碟10搬蓮到光碟積層/ 分離裝置D上之第1位置11時,利用剛體碟搬蓮裝置12 將剛體碟8裝載在該光碟1 0上。然後,在該剛體碟8上 搬蓮和裝載下一個之光碟10。因此,在各個光碟1Q之間 存在有剛體碟8 ,和在第1位置11之光碟保持器7上, 交替的重叠光碟10和剛體碟8 。在此處該剛體碟8被配 置和積層在位於該光碟積層/分離裝置D上之第4位置 -27-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 _B7_五、發明說明(;) 1 3之光碟保持器7上。 以此種方式之積層狀態裝載有光碟10之光碟保持器7 ,經由設在光碟積層/分離裝置D之輸送帶(光碟保持 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五 7 上用部以射型 經位載於上碟位 之交 第 器 D 理外所照子 72 移位 7 體 3 層10 該 持置處到,面離 器第10在器剛第 積碟 在 C 保裝化出慢端正 持之碟置持之於 之光。 ,理碟離硬露較該進 保上光配保上位 上與上 後處光分面面化對促 碟 D 將和碟 7 將 7 的 7 然延之 / 端合硬由來 光置 2 層光器14。器度器 。展10層。貼其經用 之裝置積之持帶13持再持 15行碟積 E 之為,以10離裝 8 置保送置保,保 置進光碟置10因中可 碟分運碟位碟輸位碟12碟 位以有光裝碟物其, 光 / 搬體 3 光用 4 光置光 5 用載於理光成。段 c 有層用剛第之利第之裝之 第,裝設處從組題手化載積利將之18就到13運11 到間,到化。性問之硬裝碟,後上置,動置搬置 動時時蓮硬的化有等之,光17然 D 位時移位碟位 移之成搬面目硬會溫物時到置,置 3 量 74 體 1 ,定完被端之線上加成成蓮位R3裝第定器第剛第 14指理14之逑外作碟組完搬 2 域離於指持到由於 } 過處帶16所紫操光性理被第區分位到保動經位 置經延送置面型工對化處14該査 / 當逹碟移,在 裝,展輸位下子手或硬面帶在撿層,目光 ,8 層 環15該由 6 成離之線線端送。碟積後數之後碟積 循置當經第達正碟外外當輸17光碟然之18然體的 器位 ,之來之光紫紫 由置到光 8 置 剛替 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(π ) 以上是本實施形態之全體之流程,對於光碟基板之從 取出區域之移載,正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之落下 照射,光碟基板之重疊,同軸搬運,展延處理,和端面 處理等,下面將分別以具體例說明。 第2圖表示利用搬蓮裝置2對被積層在取出區域A2, A5之第1或第2光碟基板la, lb進行移載時之步驟。另 外,圖中所示之光碟基板是第1光碟基板la,但是在移 載第2光碟基板lb時,亦採用與以下之步驟相同之步驟 。因此,圖中之第1光碟基板la亦可以是第2光碟基板 1 b〇 在搬蓮裝置2 ,如第2圖中所示,設有彈性施加裝置 (最表面光碟基板保持裝置)22。該彈性施加裝置22具備 有:真空吸著部221 ,用來真空吸著第1光碟基板la,· 往復動作部222,用來使真空吸著部221依照第1光碟基 板1 a, 1 b之板面之正交方向進行往復動作;和變位抑制 部223 ,用來機槭式限制第1光碟基板la之一部份。另 外,該彈性施加裝置22亦具有作為保持裝置之功能,經 由使真空吸著部221進行動作用來保持第1光碟基板la。 在移載第1光碟基板la時,搬蓮裝置2被配置成面對 第1光碟基板la中之最表層之一片la1,如(a)所示,使 其真空吸著部221和變位限制部2 2 3接觸在第1光碟基板 1 a ' 0 其次,使真空吸著部221以真空吸著第1光碟基板laf 之板面,然後如(b)所示的使往復動作部222縮退。在這 -2 9- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明( 種情況,被設在往復動作部222之前端之真空吸著部221 以吸著第1光碟基板la之狀態,被提上到上方,利用這 種方式,第1光碟基板la中之被真空吸著部221吸著之 部份,變位到上方。 這時,第1光碟基板la'中之被變位抑制部223接觸之 部份,被變位抑制部2 2 3機械式的限制,用來限制其變 位,其結果是具有可撓性之材料所形成之第1光碟基板 la1,如(b)所示的變形成彎曲狀態,因此在第1光碟基 板la '産生畸變。 然而,最表層之第1光碟基板la',和接觸在其下側 之另一第1光碟基板la(以下稱為第1光碟基板U”)因 為均具有高表面平滑性,所以變成利用靜電力或真空吸 力模擬接著之狀態。在這種情況,當最表層之第1光碟 基板la'如上所逑的變形時,1光碟基板la1和模擬吸著 之第1光碟基板la",均變成為受到沿著最表層之第1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 0 裝 . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 光元 最,光 使力 1 復 與者 1 而著 第之 於生第 ,附 之變 由産之 大之 側畸 是而側 變間 下除 變用下 之之 ,消 畸作除 變, 此以 之之消 畸la 因用 生力能 之板 。到 産著不 =基 用受 所附,la碟 作時 =I 時 板光 之同lay 力 基 1 量, 板-元 碟第 力變 基la復 光與 之畸 碟板於 1 於 形生 光基大 I 第大 變産 1 碟力BI1著件 , 亦 第光著 Μ 隨元 la= 。 之 1 附 7 在復 板la用側第該la,之 基板作下之當板是生 碟基之在層以基但産 光碟力 表所碟 所 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(Μ ) 之情況時,下側之第1光碟基板la"偏離第1光碟基板 la',復元成更為平板狀。利用這種方式可以將最表層 之第1光碟基板1 a '引離下側之第1光碟基板1 a ”,可以 確實的防止同時取出2片之第1光碟基板la。 依照這種方式,在將第1光碟基板1 a '引離下側之第1 光碟基板la”之後,以利用真空吸著部221吸著第1光碟 基板la’之狀態,使搬蓮裝置2移動到上方。在這種情 況,第1光碟基板la’維持彈性狀態的被引離。利用這 種方式可以防止第1光碟基板la1再附著在la"。然後使 該往復動作部2 2 2回到原來之位置,藉以使第1光碟基 板1'復元成更為平板狀。然後,將依此方式引離之第1 光碟基板la’移動到下一値處理工程。 另外,在上述方式之使第1光碟基板la'彎曲變形之 情況時,假如彎曲之曲率變小時,畸變就變大。因此, 在第1光碟基板laf産生之復元力亦變大,可以用來調 整第1光碟基板la'之離開力。另外,要使彎曲之曲率 變大時,可以使真空吸著部221和變位抑制部223之距離 變小,或是使往復動作部222之移動距離變大。 依照上逑之方式,當從取出區域A2之光碟保持器7取 出指定量之光碟基板時,光碟保持器7成為變空之狀態 ,該變空之光碟保持器7經由搬蓮路徑被搬運到光碟積 層區域。 然後,將依此方式取出之第1和第2光碟基板la,lb 中之第1光碟基板la供給到塗布台B之供給位置B1。供 -31- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) L---r-------«裝 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)6 1X This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of Invention (^) It will be difficult to realize the limited space of the production line. For a mass-produced DVD, it is not practical to prepare a large flat surface for a corner of a flat surface. The DVD is formed in a form in which a ring-shaped convex portion (annular convex portion) is provided on the outer periphery of the sandwiched area. Since the convex portions exist on the outside of the DVD, since the upper and lower annular convex portions are in contact with each other when they are laminated, the disc surfaces do not contact each other. Therefore, during the delay of the progress of the lamination, the DVD with lower rigidity will change into an umbrella shape due to its own weight and the weight of the DVD laminated on it, that is, it will be warped. The DVD is a type without a convex ring. In this case, there is no deformation due to the existence of the convex ring. However, if the number of layers in the stack is large, small deformations will accumulate, and the deformation of the DVD located on the upper layer of the stack will have problems that cannot be ignored in product specifications. In order to achieve a static flat surface in a limited space, it is considered to interpose a rigid body disk having a flat surface between laminated disks, such as a disk made of A1. Among them, the special feature of the present invention is to have: a layering device for making the DV of the employee's consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed and loaded into a disc for DV to achieve the volume of the disc. The layering is important to make Gangda productive, and it is enough to make use of it, for example, the surface energy is good and the example is set to the most. Zhuangping only considers the convenience and thickness of the equipment line that contains the quality test Fanggang. When the dish is used to produce lotus seeds, the dishes must be moved with the body, and it is just small. Medium, but outside the time horizon. Time-consuming accumulates more than 9 pieces of photographs. Limiting the field Often, the other discs on the multi-layers are different from the discs, and they should be lotus roots. In addition, the paper size of the paper for those who have not moved is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Polyester with the same material as the DVD substrate . In this case, the thickness needs to be determined in a sufficiently rigid manner. Metal plates can also be used to make rigid discs. In this case, it is best to use aluminum or titanium with a lower specific gravity. In the case where a DVD having a convex shape is not formed, a rigid disk having a simple plane can be used, but in the case of a DVD having a convex ring, it is necessary to make the rigid disk not to interfere with the For the shape of the convex ring, for example, a sulcus groove is formed in a portion corresponding to the annular convex portion. In addition, the flatness of the flat surface is not particularly limited as long as the bending is accommodated within a specified range, and it can be determined experimentally in accordance with the conditions of extension and the like. In addition, a flat surface does not have to be a continuous plane in its entirety, as long as it can achieve the desired purpose, it can also be an intermittent plane. For example, annular members with different diameters may be arranged on the same axis. The so-called flat surface here also includes the concept of such a structure. In such a device, since it is stretched on a stationary flat surface, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bending. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. After the positive ion UV-curable composition is stretched, the disc can be cured until the resin is completely cured. However, when production efficiency is considered, it can be moved to another location. During the short period after the extension, because the positive-ion ultraviolet-curable composition is in an uncured state, care must be taken to move the lotus carefully; otherwise, the two disc substrates will be relatively shifted. In addition, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition protruding from the outer peripheral end face of the disc having a heavy S body is sticky, and therefore has a problem of poor work efficiency. -* 18- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (α) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The review found that when a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is irradiated for a short period of time with ultraviolet rays having a certain illuminance or more, curing can be greatly promoted. In addition, by means of short-term irradiation of ultraviolet rays having a certain illuminance or more, it is confirmed that flash irradiation using a flash is very effective. The ultraviolet irradiation at this time may be performed not on the surface of the optical disk substrate but on the outer peripheral end surface. In the case of focusing on the end surface and irradiating, there is almost no problem with the defective image due to the heat from the lamp light source. In the apparatus of the present invention, a special feature is provided with a second ultraviolet irradiation device for irradiating ultraviolet rays on each end face of the multi-disc disc. In this way, the positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition on the end faces of the two optical disc substrates can be hardened quickly, the problem of stickiness can be eliminated, and the offset during the moving of the lotus can be prevented. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs in this way, the end face of the disc is irradiated with ultraviolet rays to harden the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition near the end face of the disc. The efficiency is poor. Therefore, for an assembly of laminated optical discs in which multiple optical discs are stacked, the end faces of each optical disc can be irradiated with ultraviolet rays. In this way, the end surface hardening treatment of many M discs can be performed at one time. In addition, the multi-disc disc is preferably rotated around the connecting line at the center of each disc when it is irradiated with ultraviolet rays by the second ultraviolet irradiation device. In this way, uniform ultraviolet rays can be easily applied to the end faces of all discs. Irradiation. The second ultraviolet irradiation device is preferably a flash type, and the effect of j on the energy saving is better. The effect can also be found when only a positive ion polymerization type starter is used. -19- This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (J) However, when a photosensitizer is used in combination, its effect can be used to enhance the effect of promoting hardening. In addition to the method of radiating ultraviolet rays from the upper part, It is also possible to use a method of warming to a specified temperature. In this case, it can also be constructed with a heat treatment device to apply heat treatment to multiple laminated discs. This means of heating, when the conditions of ultraviolet radiation are compared, The equipment needed is only cheap equipment, so it can effectively reduce the production cost. The temperature for heating needs to be appropriately determined according to the material of the substrate of the optical disc and the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition. In the case of DVD When the temperature exceeds 70 ° C, the substrate of the disc will be deformed due to thermal stress, so it is best to be below 7 Q ° C. In addition, in order to promote positive ions For hardening of UV-curable composition, it is best to use a heating temperature of 4 Q ° C or higher. The heating device can be a general heater equipped with a heating wire heater, but it is best to use it in consideration of heating performance. A heater equipped with a halogen heater. Also, when compared with an electric heater, a quartz heater, a ceramic heater, or other heaters, the time from the start of heating to the desired temperature can be It is shortened, so it can be printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs so that the surface heat can be fully used for shooting, and C can be used to make the external discs effective at the same time. The most specific lines can be set, the forward will be a good example of the use of the box, the best way to open the side, the end, because of the time when the dynasty knows. Room 0-. 1 The light can be used to change the temperature and the constant temperature of the device. The heat of the force can be added with the same degree of heat. The heat can be added to the curved phase thermostat. The heat can be added to the fixed hot halogen. The hot plate is added to the speed. Film-coated light-emitting halogen shot this sample control to reverse the same paper The standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of invention Invention: Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumption Cooperative, Produces a disc, and produces α degrees 00. When the light is fixed, use two heats at W thickness -1. Turn to C1 to make the system, so the film is fixed so that the plus is 4, and 1cm away from the rotation for h. The style is only set, but the D ^ class is 7. The distance is not constant. 05 is used to stiffen the emotions, and the style is to match. The force is often ~. The disc works 1 can be hard-wired to the time of the lotus. Go through 10 discs, light advance, d, outside the line is the suction method. The suction body is also the same as the material limitation. For the light to turn the formula into a purple method, the spinner is selected by all the materials and methods. The hard-benefit purple-shaped square and other seeds are not shot but touch the U-board. Select the hottest model of the hottest model. The end, the connection of the special base of the disc is also true. I do n’t just use I / as the source of this disc. The light and the air can be used externally because of the light multi-device. The Q disc can be used at the right point, but the correct point can be applied. The purple C surrounds the heat with only 20 light to view it. When the ei is set up, the degree ~ when it is used, it will be stacked to produce. It is assumed that the condition of the lotus root and the fixed-rate 20-degree interval can lead to a sudden increase in the middle-end side. The style of the disc is changed to choose the strong air condition. The effect of the disc is in front of the high-tech production. Before the disc is completed, the disc can be turned into a light beam. ^ Good Lie Festival is based on the arm dish of the raw style, which is still hot, and the light is the distance from the device, and the surface is adhered to the outside. In the heat, the medium seed dish sticks light while holding it, but it is the same. The heat is strengthened from time to time, and the light is hard to protect. The connection side adds this rate end and the standard device. Carrie, according to Gu Zhi's side, the disc is the most outward. The heat of the disc is so far that the disciplinary object is placed in the light absorption room. The light is produced by 01 | 1 plus only 15 stacks of heat, and the disc is made by lotus (please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (/) One of the disc substrates is affected by the centrifugal force or acceleration when moving the lotus. There is a problem that the axis shift occurs. A disc with a misaligned axis cannot be used, so it is discarded as a defective product. In order to reduce the influence of the centrifugal force or acceleration applied to the unfixed disc substrate when moving the lotus, the effective method is to slow down the conveying speed, but it will cause a problem of reduced production efficiency. The device of the present invention may be provided with: a holding device for holding the optical disk; a coaxial device for aligning the positions of the inner wall surfaces of the hole portions of the two optical disk substrates; and a moving device for making the holding device and The coaxial device moves simultaneously. In this case, the coaxial device is preferably a diameter expanding / contracting device. That is, the holding device is used to hold the coupled optical disc, and the coaxial device is used to make the coaxiality of the 2Η disc substrate coaxial, so that the positions of the inner wall surfaces of the hole portions are aligned. In this state, the moving device is used to move the holding device and the coaxial device at the same time, so that the optical disc can be moved in the stage where the adhesive is not hardened. It is not necessary to leave the optical disc still until the hardener is cured. At the bonding place, effective bonding of the optical disc substrate can be performed, thereby improving the production efficiency of the optical disc. Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. When the axis of the two disc substrates is made coaxial, a method of aligning the outer edge of the substrate and a hole provided at the center of the main surface of the substrate is used. If the method of aligning the position of the hole portion is the method of aligning the position of the hole portion, it can be easily handled even when the size of the optical disc substrate is changed. In addition, when the substrate of the optical disc is very thin, when the force is applied to the outer edge portion of the substrate for alignment, it may be bent and distorted. -22- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (W) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the hard drive end is put on the hard disk, and it is used for the optical transport line. The off-site move to Fang Shijin is very tolerant and open. The actual shooting of the ministry is very good, and the pattern for development must be changed according to the original position of the claws. When the master of the object is on the other line, the number of claws can be displayed to expand it. The external comparison shortens the table to set the positive group of the setting Ill10 state purple ratio to install it. Sex. The cover is small and the size is large, and it is a W-shaped structure with a large shape and a large mouth. Make the structure of the build-up prevention of Lianlian Μ changes can be expanded. The light of the square dish is framed by light. The path of moving the disc of love U is the surface c light gait, which is slightly exposed outside. The light capacity of the disc is straight but the shape of the wall mode is purple. The inner part of the daytime axis W is also used when the inside shape is shot. The rigid part of the light axis is also made or used, and the same weight is applied to the plate. (The same amount of holes as the good part of the department.) i Download and install the bright line (C dish product is the most powerful hole P surface 1 said at the mouth of the disc is straight and the light is present. However, I added the pick-up I flat display light display using the spray to show The figure shows the state, and the gas-filling board is used to hold the table. The table is used as a table. B) The table-like questions are quasi-axis blank as the base map. 〇 The question of the figure is to use the same 装 discs 2 and 3 groups at 4: 5678. The 910th figure is placed immediately. Grasp pressure [^ system base surface (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention ( γ) Figure 11 is a summary Configuration diagram for showing one example of a disc attached to the end faces of the ultraviolet irradiation method of assembly. Fig. 12 is a schematic structural view showing a device used for irradiating ultraviolet rays to an end face of an optical disc assembly. Fig. 13 shows the experimental results of Example 3. Fig. 14 shows the appearance of the optical discs of Example 3 and Comparative Examples. Fig. 15 shows the structure of another example of a coating device for a positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition. The result of the experiment of Example 4 is shown in Fig. 16 (a). FIG. 17 shows experimental results of a comparative example of Example 4. FIG. Fig. 18 shows another example of the lotus moving device shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 19 shows still another example of the carrying device shown in Fig. 2 (a). Fig. 2G is a plan view showing a second embodiment of the optical disc manufacturing apparatus of the present invention in a schematic manner. Fig. 21 is a perspective view schematically showing a disc stacking / separating device used in the disc manufacturing apparatus of Fig. 20. Fig. 22 is an elevation view showing the first moving path of the disc stacking / separating device of the 21st drawing. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Figure 23 is an elevation view showing the second conveying path of the disc stacking / separating device of the 21st drawing. Fig. 24 is a plan view schematically showing a third embodiment of the optical disc manufacturing apparatus of the present invention. Fig. 25 is an elevational view showing, in a schematic manner, a disc transfer device used in the disc manufacturing apparatus of Fig. 24; -24- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1). Place the display, load, and press the display. The table is light, the table is the table, the model is the formula, the model is the surface, and the cross-sectional surface is vertical. Figure 6 7 2 2 In this state Z, the use of the face is clear j ^ ΪEnergy * T®® real 53 real face 1 use the first output product to take the disc base and the disc, the light R3 has a domain containing package inspection to check the disc Light structure, the R2 area installation area causes the MK D disc DV light, which shows that the storage area of the R area and the area layer in the A1 state domain-like area is stored: for the light containing the lb clad board to form the base disk 1 ± R 2 Take out the plate and the base plate and the disc in the domain and the light 1 1 0¾ £ Take out the plate and the base plate in the domain and the area •, 2 Hold the insurance and hold the insurance with the 1 plus 7 device The disc 7 〇 The optical disc is held next to a pair with a holding disc, with a falling plate, a fat-based B tree disc, and the cloth is lightly clothed. The first coating is hard: the line is outside, and the purple 5 is set. The weight of the sub-assembly is R2, and the realm comes; the area uses la to form a 4-plate system, and the base disc is installed to light the light. i a pair of panels are based on the second surface of the dish, the second surface of the tree and the first surface of the hard line, etc. In addition, the purple pattern is borrowed from the child, and the positive lb has the bottom panel. The light weight of falling discs ab 1i Λζ 1 ± (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Equipment: Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The storage area is stored in the storage area of D0V 1 2 DRR. The area is installed in the storage area, and the plate is made into the light plate. The base disk product is based on A. The upper area: area: save, store 7 from 7, when the device is held, the base disk is held in the optical J 1X 2 and the first shipment is installed. This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4 and the line are actually on the 7th and 21st arms to protect the disc, and the time is on the A2 layer The domain area will come out and use it. Move the 7-line traveler to hold the disc line light 保 ρκ I. The domain type area will be transferred to the halberd / If with 0 sharp disk 0 light B1. The top of the three-layer and four-port table is the most rotating. The la platen cloth base plate is coated with light. The two-layer 2 R area has no area. Complete the production of 7 optical discs to the base of the optical disk for holding the optical disk. The first area of the first area of the optical disk A2 will be taken in order. There is a moving layer. The new area of the domain device that moves the product A2 7 keeps the security area A1 to take the disk domain to the optical area, so that the storage and storage can save 7, and the slave and the maintenance, to maintain the storage area 1 of the A3 disk area. The base holds the disc light, 1 turn of the first rotation of the B1 to the azimuth to give the arrow to the B. The painting platform is clothed with the cloth 3 to the turn of the rotation of the supply, use a sharp side, lla outer plate and another base plate Shoot the drop with a IX plate base dish light 1 ±. Place the B2 position and apply it to the coating position. Move to the group to move the group into the group to form the square. Harden the line. The arrow is hard. The line is purple. Draw the Zizi according to the shape of the 3 sub-platform and turn it to normal. Spin the cloth to make the spray coating, follow the time line into the outside and finish the purple cloth is dropped to make it, the ring 45 4 with the object 4 into the arm position No. 1 s2 relocation to the installation of moving lotus relocation la by plate Jingji, dish la light plate 1 base disc will light to 1 straight _ first, of Xuanlian moved by the rotation position U ---- ^ 11 ------ installed --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The installation of the violating S is to store the light of the A4 stacking area and the storage of the C platen. The light of the heavy disk R2 is formed from the waiting area. The C plate is lightly stacked to the heavy WE right-handed zone storage. The board is based on the lb disc. The light disc is based on the light. The R1 2 field should be taken out. Take the lb board, the base disc, and the disc light to the 2nd place to hold it. Keep the 2 discs in place. Install in / BE. When moving, top 21: Arm: Yes, equipped with 7 and 7 timers. A5 holding area discs to take out the light to A moving range. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (/) The second disc substrate 1b held on the disc holder 7 is located at the outermost layer, and is moved to the superimposed table C. In this way, the second optical disc substrate 1b is sequentially supplied to the heavy stage C. Then, when the second disc substrate 1b on which the disc holder 7 in the area A5 is completely removed is removed, the disc holder 7 is moved to the disc holder storage area A 6 and a new one is made from the disc substrate storage area A 4 The disc holder 7 on which the second disc substrate 1b is stacked moves to the take-out area A5. On the heavy day table C, the first optical disk substrate la is superposed on the waiting second optical disk substrate 1b by the overlapping device 5. Of course, the two disc substrates are overlapped by the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45. It is to be noted that the overlay is hereinafter referred to as an optical disc. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The optical disc 10 is moved into the optical disc production area R2 via the coaxial lotus transfer device 6 along the lotus transfer path 9 The disc stacking / separating device D, move it to the disc holder 7 located at the first position 11 of the disc stacking / separating device D. In this optical disc stacking / separating device D, a stretching process is performed in a state where a plurality of optical discs 10 are stacked. As previously mentioned, the extension process is realized in a limited space. Among them, when only the optical disc is laminated, because the optical disc is deformed and shifted, when the optical disc 10 is moved to the first position 11 on the optical disc lamination / separation device D, the rigid body disc moving device 12 is used to move the rigid body disc 8 Loaded on this disc 10. Then, the rigid body disc 8 is loaded with a lotus and the next optical disc 10 is loaded. Therefore, a rigid body disc 8 exists between each of the optical discs 1Q, and the optical disc holder 10 and the rigid body disc 8 are alternately superposed on the optical disc holder 7 at the first position 11. Here, the rigid body disc 8 is arranged and laminated in the fourth position on the optical disc lamination / separation device D-27. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 _B7 _V. Description of the invention (;) 1 3 on the disc holder 7. The disc holder 7 of the optical disc 10 is loaded in the laminated state in this way, and is printed by the conveyor belt provided on the optical disc lamination / separation device D (printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Economic Affairs). The warrior is placed on the top of the disc. The device D is outside the photo 72. Shift 7 Body 3 Layer 10 The place where the holder is located. The disc is held by the light., The hard disc is harder than the hard dew. The upper surface and the upper and lower positions of the disc should be smoothed. Promote the disc D and the disc 7 and 7 of 7. The end of the hard end of the light is placed on two layers of light device 14. Measure device. Exhibit 10 layers. Paste the device used by the product holding belt 13 holding and then holding 15 lines of the disk product E, with 10 off the 8 position guarantee delivery Guarantee, keep in the optical disc set 10 because of the medium can be divided into discs, transport discs, discs, 12 discs, there are optical discs, light / carrying 3 light 4 light set 5 light used in Ricoh. Section c There is a layer that uses the first of the first and the first of the first. The installation office starts from the group title and stores the product, and then transfers it from 18 to 13 and transports it between 11 and 11. The hard problem is the hard disk. When you move, you have to wait for the time when the lotus is hard. When the position is 17, the displacement of the disc is the same as when you move it. You will be warm when you are warm. Set 3, 74, and 1 to finish the line. The addition of R3 is equipped with the first fixer, the 14th fingering, the 14th fingering, and the 14th fingering. The outer disk is finished and moved to 2 domains. This is due to the finger hold. Because of the 16 bands, the purple light photonics were placed in the first place. The warp position is extended to set the surface area to the chemical department. 14 The inspection / When the plate is moved, the hand or hard surface belt is under the pick-up layer when looking at the installation and exhibition stand. Looking at it, the 8-layer ring 15 should be separated by 60%. Send by wire end. After the disc is counted, the disc will be placed on the outside of the first disc. When the disc is lost, it will lose 17 discs and 18 positions. Please read the notes on the back before filling this page.) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). 470952 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 B7. ) The above is the overall flow of this embodiment. For the transfer of the optical disk substrate from the take-out area, the falling and irradiating of the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition The overlap, coaxial transfer, extension processing, and end surface processing of the optical disc substrate will be described below with specific examples. Figure 2 shows the first or second optical discs that are stacked in the take-out areas A2 and A5 by the lotus transfer device 2. The substrates la and lb are subjected to the steps of transfer. In addition, the optical disk substrate shown in the figure is the first optical disk substrate la, but when the second optical disk substrate lb is transferred, the same steps as the following steps are also adopted. Therefore, The first optical disc substrate 1a in the figure may also be the second optical disc substrate 1b. In the lotus moving device 2, as shown in FIG. 2, an elastic application device (most surface optical disc substrate holding device) 22 is provided. The elasticity applying device 22 is provided with a vacuum suction section 221 for vacuum suction of the first optical disk substrate 1a, and a reciprocating action section 222 for causing the vacuum suction section 221 to conform to the first optical disk substrate 1a, 1b. The plate surface is reciprocated in the orthogonal direction; and the displacement suppressing part 223 is used to limit a part of the first optical disc substrate la by a machine map. In addition, the elasticity applying device 22 also has a function as a holding device, and the first vacuum disk substrate 1a is held by operating the vacuum suction unit 221. When the first optical disc substrate la is transferred, the lotus device 2 is arranged so as to face one of the outermost sheets la1 of the first optical disc substrate la, as shown in (a), so that the vacuum suction portion 221 and the displacement restriction are restricted. The portion 2 2 3 is in contact with the first optical disc substrate 1 a '0. Next, the vacuum suction portion 221 vacuum-sucks the plate surface of the first optical disc substrate laf, and then retracts the reciprocating portion 222 as shown in (b). Here 2 9- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-Install 470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (case The vacuum suction part 221 provided at the front end of the reciprocating action part 222 is lifted up in a state of sucking the first optical disc substrate la. In this way, the vacuum suction part in the first optical disc substrate la The portion 221 attracted is displaced upward. At this time, the portion of the first optical disc substrate la 'contacted by the displacement suppression portion 223 is mechanically restricted by the displacement suppression portion 2 2 3 to limit its As a result of the displacement, the first optical disc substrate la1 formed of a flexible material is deformed into a bent state as shown in (b), so distortion occurs in the first optical disc substrate la '. However, the first surface layer 1 disc substrate la 'and another first disc substrate la (hereinafter referred to as the first disc substrate U ") contacting the lower side thereof have high surface smoothness, so they are simulated by electrostatic force or vacuum suction. State. In this case, when the top surface of the first optical disc substrate When la 'is deformed as described above, both the 1-disc substrate la1 and the 1st disc substrate la " simulating adsorption become the 1st along the outermost surface (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 0 Equipment. The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's consumer co-operative society printed the lightest, the lightest power 1 the reseller 1 and the first birth, the additional changes are caused by the large side distortion and side changes. In the following, the anti-aliasing is used to remove the change. Therefore, the anti-aliasing is due to the use of a plate of energy. To the production is not = the basic use is attached, when the la plate is working = I, the same light of the board. Based on the quantity of 1 plate, the plate-yuan disc first force variable base la complex light and its abnormal disc plate at 1 Yu Xingsheng Guang Da I the first large-scale production of 1 disc force BI1, also the first light M with yuan la =. No. 1 Attachment 7 On the side of the multi-layer la, the substrate under the la is used as the substrate. When the substrate is a raw disk, the substrate is based on a layer but the disc is produced by a compact disk. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4. (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 _B7_ 5. In the case of the invention description (M), the first optical disc substrate la " off from the first light The substrate la 'is restored into a more flat shape. In this way, the first optical disc substrate 1 a' at the outermost layer can be led away from the lower first optical disc substrate 1 a ”, which can reliably prevent simultaneous removal of two first optical disc substrates 1 a”. In this way, after the first optical disc substrate 1 a 'is pulled away from the lower first optical disc substrate 1a', the first optical disc substrate 1a 'is sucked by the vacuum suction portion 221, Move the lotus device 2 upward. In this case, the first optical disk substrate la 'is pulled away while maintaining the elastic state. In this way, it is possible to prevent the first optical disk substrate la1 from being reattached to la ". Then, the reciprocating portion 2 2 2 is returned to the original position, so that the first optical disc substrate 1 'is restored to a more flat shape. Then, the first optical disc substrate la 'removed in this manner is moved to the next processing step. In addition, in the case where the first optical disc substrate 1a 'is bent and deformed as described above, if the curvature of the bend becomes smaller, the distortion becomes larger. Therefore, the restoration force generated on the first optical disc substrate laf also becomes large, and it can be used to adjust the separation force of the first optical disc substrate la '. In order to increase the curvature of the bending, the distance between the vacuum suction portion 221 and the displacement suppression portion 223 may be reduced, or the moving distance of the reciprocating portion 222 may be increased. According to the above method, when a specified amount of the disc substrate is taken out from the disc holder 7 in the take-out area A2, the disc holder 7 becomes empty, and the emptied disc holder 7 is carried to the disc via the moving path. Laminated area. Then, the first optical disk substrate la among the first and second optical disk substrates la, lb taken out in this manner is supplied to the supply position B1 of the coating station B. For -31- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) L --- r ------- «(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

訂---------線J 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(V) 給到該供給位置B1之第1光碟基板la,利用旋轉台3之 依圔中之箭頭方向之旋轉,用來移動到塗布位置B2。 在位於塗布位置B2之第1光碟基板la上,利用落下照 射裝置4使被紫外線照射之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物成為璟狀之落下和塗布。 下面將參照第3圖用來説明用以照射紫外線和使正離 子型紫外線硬化性組成物落下到光碟基板之裝置之構造 。在第3画中,符號41是分配器(噴嘴),用來使正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物落下,4 2是紫外線照射裝置,43 是框體,在内面具有反射板,44是光碟基板裝載台。 該分配器41使用美國EFD公司之型號1500DV(噴嘴内徑 為0.83mm),紫外線照射裝置42使用優盛公司製之紫外 線照射裝置I25Q型,D燈(發光長度約25cm)。另外,光 碟基板裝載台4 4可以利用圖中未顯示之馬達使其旋轉。 另外,紫外線照射裝置4 2和落下之正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物之距離為5〇fflIn,g外,紫外線照射裝置42和落 下之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之周圍,被具有内面 以反射板構成之框體43加以包圍,可以用來提高紫外線 照射之均一性。 在使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物45落下之期間,經 由使紫外線照射裝置42發光,用來對該正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物4 5照射紫外線。在這期間因為使光碟基板 裝載台4 4進行旋轉,所以該正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物4 5以環狀塗布在第1光碟基板la。3外,第1光碟基 _ 3 2 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . _ 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(y ) 板la之環狀凸部在圖中加以省略。當完成指定量之正離 子型紫外線硬化性組成物45之落下後,使快門43a向圖 中之左方移動,用來關閉使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物45通過之孔。然後,讓欲使正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物4 5落下之第1光碟基板1 a移動到來時,就使快門 43a以画中之狀態進行動作,再度的開始正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物4 5之落下。在該正離子型紫外線硬化性 組成物4 5未落下之期間,亦連續進行紫外線照射裝置4 2 之發光,所以經由進行快門4 3 a之開閉,可以防止紫外 線對分配器4 1照射,藉以防止其閉塞。 另外,如第4圖所示,該分配器41被紫外線曝光防止 蓋46保護,使従該紫外線照射裝置42照射之紫外線不會曝光。 第5圖是分配器41和紫外線曝光防止蓋46之擴大圖。 第5 ( a )圖中,噴嘴前端4 1 a到紫外線曝光防止蓋4 6之 開口部46a之距離(圖中之符號d )變大時,紫外線遮蔽 效果就變大。但是,d太大時正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物之落下距離就變長,因為會有裝置金體之高度變高 之問題,所以最好在d之決定時考慮到此點。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 紫外線曝光防止蓋46之開口部46a之直徑(圖中之符號 D )變小時紫外線遮蔽效果就變大。但是,D太小時會 産生正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物4 5接觸到開口部46a 之問題,所以最好在D之決定時亦考慮到此點。 紫外線曝光防止蓋46之直徑(圖中之符號L )與噴嘴前 端41a之直徑之比變大時紫外線遮蔽效果就變大。但是 -33-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(》) L太大時,因為會有裝置全體之大小變大之問題,所以 最好在L之決定時考慮到此點。g外,當l之大小與分 配器41之外徑没有很大之不同時,從開口部46a射入之 紫外線在紫外線曝光防止蓋4 6之内面進行反射,間接的 照射在噴嘴前端4 1 a所以會有使其被閉塞之問題。為著 防止此種問題,紫外線曝光防止蓋4 6之内面最好以不容 易反射(容易吸收)紫外線之材料構成。 另外,亦可以構建成如第5(b)圖所示,在紫外線曝光 防止蓋4 6之開口部46a設置快門4 7。在不吐正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物出時假如使快門4 7閉合則不會有紫外線 照射在噴嘴前端4 1 a 。在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 4 5之吐出時,可以將快門4 7打開後再進行吐出。利用此 種構造可以更進一步的增加紫外線遮蔽效果,藉以有效 的防止噴嘴前端4 1 a之閉塞。 其中,當重複進行正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物45之 落下時,在噴嘴前端41a會産生有正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物45之液體積存。巻著防止此種問題所使用之方 法有. ':丨 U)利用脱氣吸引裝置用來吸引和除去液體積體, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ! (2)利用氣體(最好是未包含有濕氣之不會與組成物反Order --------- Line J Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (V) 1 The optical disc substrate la is moved to the coating position B2 by the rotation in the direction of the arrow in the rotation of the turntable 3. On the first optical disk substrate 1a located at the application position B2, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition irradiated with ultraviolet rays is dropped and applied by a falling irradiation device 4 by a drop irradiation device 4. The structure of an apparatus for irradiating ultraviolet rays and dropping an ion-type ultraviolet curable composition onto a disc substrate will be described with reference to FIG. In the third drawing, reference numeral 41 is a dispenser (nozzle) for dropping a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition, 42 is an ultraviolet irradiation device, 43 is a frame body, which has a reflective plate on the inner surface, and 44 is a disc substrate. Loading table. The distributor 41 uses an EFD company model 1500DV (nozzle inner diameter is 0.83 mm), and the ultraviolet irradiation device 42 uses a UV irradiation device I25Q manufactured by Yosun Corporation, and a D lamp (lighting length of about 25 cm). In addition, the disc substrate loading table 44 can be rotated by a motor not shown in the figure. In addition, the distance between the ultraviolet irradiation device 42 and the falling positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is 50 μgIn, and the periphery of the ultraviolet irradiation device 42 and the falling positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is provided with an inner surface so that The frame 43 constituted by the reflecting plate is surrounded and can be used to improve the uniformity of ultraviolet irradiation. While the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is being dropped, the ultraviolet irradiation device 42 is caused to emit light to irradiate the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 with ultraviolet rays. During this period, the disc substrate mounting table 4 4 is rotated, so that the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45 is applied in a ring shape to the first disc substrate 1 a. 3, the first optical disc base _ 3 2-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). _ 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (y) The annular convex portion of the plate la is omitted in the figure. After the fall of the specified amount of the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is completed, the shutter 43a is moved to the left in the figure to close the hole through which the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition 45 passes. Then, when the first optical disc substrate 1 a which is intended to drop the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is moved, the shutter 43 a is operated in the state shown in the picture, and the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is started again. 4 of 5 fall. During the period when the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45 is not dropped, the ultraviolet irradiation device 4 2 is continuously emitted. Therefore, by opening and closing the shutter 4 3 a, it is possible to prevent ultraviolet rays from radiating to the dispenser 41 to prevent It's occluded. In addition, as shown in Fig. 4, the dispenser 41 is protected by an ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46 so that ultraviolet rays irradiated from the ultraviolet irradiation device 42 are not exposed. Fig. 5 is an enlarged view of the dispenser 41 and the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46. In Fig. 5 (a), as the distance from the front end of the nozzle 41a to the opening 46a of the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46 (the symbol d in the figure) becomes larger, the ultraviolet shielding effect becomes larger. However, when d is too large, the fall distance of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition becomes longer. Since there is a problem that the height of the gold body of the device becomes high, it is best to take this into consideration when determining d. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The diameter of the opening 46a (the symbol D in the figure) of the UV exposure prevention cover 46 becomes smaller as the UV shielding effect becomes larger. However, if D is too small, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 may come into contact with the opening 46a. Therefore, it is better to take this into consideration when determining D. As the ratio of the diameter of the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46 (the symbol L in the figure) to the diameter of the nozzle front end 41a becomes larger, the ultraviolet shielding effect becomes larger. But -33- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (") When L is too large, there will be a problem that the size of the entire device becomes larger. So it is best to take this into account when deciding on L. In addition, when the size of l is not significantly different from the outer diameter of the dispenser 41, the ultraviolet rays incident from the opening 46a are reflected on the inner surface of the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46, and indirectly irradiated on the front end of the nozzle 4 1 a So there is the problem of occlusion. To prevent such problems, the inner surface of the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46 is preferably made of a material that does not easily reflect (absorb easily) ultraviolet rays. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 5 (b), a shutter 47 may be provided in the opening 46a of the ultraviolet exposure prevention cover 46. When the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is not emitted, if the shutter 4 7 is closed, no ultraviolet rays will be irradiated to the front end 4 1 a of the nozzle. When the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45 is ejected, the shutter 47 can be opened and then ejected. With this structure, the ultraviolet shielding effect can be further increased, thereby effectively preventing the front end of the nozzle 41 from being blocked. However, when the dropping of the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is repeated, a liquid volume of the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is generated at the nozzle tip 41a. The methods used to prevent such problems are: ': U) The use of a degassing suction device to attract and remove the liquid volume, printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs! (2) Use of gas (preferably Does not contain moisture and does not react with the composition

I j應之氣體)用來將液體積存吹散, ^ I (3)利用旋轉容積式泵(其代表例是「單自動分配器」 之商品名稱;日本國兵神裝備公司製)進行正離子型紫 \外線硬化性組成物45之吐出,在吐出完成後,使該泵以 -34-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(w) 與吐出方向相反之方向進行旋轉,用來使液體積存回到 噴嘴4 1内。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 最好使該正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物4 5可以回收再 利用。 如上所述,經由使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物4 5以 環狀落下,被塗布之第1光碟基板la在重疊裝置5形成 與第2光碟基板lb重疊。 下面將根據第6圖用來說明2片之光碟基板之重疊。 在第6圖中,重疊裝置5之構成包含有:一對之光碟 基板保持台51,52;鉸鏈53,用來連接該保持台51,52 ,·和吸引路徑5 4 ,連接到圖中未顯示之真空泵。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如第6(a)圖所示,在光碟基板保持台51裝載塗布有璟 狀之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物45之第1光碟基板la ,和在光碟基板保持台52裝載第2光碟基板lb。驅動圖 中未顯示之真空泵,經由吸引路徑54用來將第1和第2 光碟基板la, lb分別吸著在光碟基板保持台51,52。然 後,從第6(a)圖之狀態使光碟基板保持台51以鉸鏈53為 中心,以高速進行旋轉。在成為第6(b)之狀態之前,假 如光碟基板保持台51接近光碟基板保持台52時,使旋轉 速度減速,然後控制成在1秒鐘,以徹單位之速度使兩 個光碟接近,然後,當第1和第2光碟基板la,lb之間 隔成為所希望之值時,就停止接近,和停止真空泵之驅 動。 重叠後之光碟10經由同軸搬運裝置6被搬蓮到下一個 ~ 3 5 -本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(W ) 之光碟積層/分離裝置D 。 第7圖表示同軸搬蓮裝置6主要部份及其作用。如第 7圖所示,該同軸搬蓮裝置6之構成包含有:空氣流通 路徑64;圓盤狀之真空吸著部62,被設在其前端;和圓 柱狀之空氣撿拾部63,從真空吸著部62之下面中央部突 出。該空氣撿拾部63為橡膠製,内部成為中空。g外, 空氣流通路徑64之供給路徑64a通到圖中未顯示之空氣 供給裝置,吸引路徑64b通到圖中未顯示之真空泵。空 氣經由供給路徑64a供給到空氣撿拾部63之中空部份, 其路徑不能變化。另外,同軸搬蓮裝置6將第1圖之搬 蓮路徑9配置成可以往復移動。 同軸搬蓮裝置6對於重疊之光碟10如第7(b)所示的, 使其與真空吸箸部62接觸用來進行真空吸引。其次,當 將空氣供給到孔徑比光碟10之孔部10a小之空氣撿拾部 63内時,就使其直徑擴大,如第7(c)圖所示,從内側均 一的推壓光碟10之孔部l〇a 。利用這種方式,即使第1光 碟基板la和第2光碟基板lb之軸心有偏移時,亦可以使 其軸心成為同軸。在此種狀態,使同軸搬蓮裝置6沿著 搬蓮路徑9移動到光碟積層/分離裝置D ,用來使被搬 運到該光碟積層/分離裝置D之光碟1G之光碟基板la, 1 b之軸心成為同軸。 在該光碟搬蓮裝置,亦可以使用夾嘴作為使軸心成為 同軸之裝置,藉以代替空氣撿拾部。 第8(a)圖是斜視圖,用來表示第2實施形態例之光碟 -36- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) _裝 470952 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(g) 搬蓮裝置,第8(b)和8(c)圖是夾嘴之擴大圖。該光磲搬 裝置6大致由真空吸著部67(保持裝置),夾嘴68 (同軸 裝置),和臂6 9構成。 如第8(a)圖所示,光碟搬運裝置6之構成是在臂69之 前端設有圓盤狀之真空吸箸部67。該夾嘴68從真空吸著 部67之下面中央部突出。臂69被構建成利用圖中未顯示 之驅動機構,可以以臂69之未設有真空吸著部67之一方 之端部近傍為中心進行旋轉。 夾嘴6 8之前端部成為第8(b)画所示之形狀,比光碟1〇 之孔部IQa之内徑細。當將夾嘴68插入到孔部IGa後使夾 嘴6 8進行動作時,如第8(c)圖所示,其爪部擴大,從内 側均一的推壓光碟10之孔部Ida 。利用這種方式,構成 光碟10之2片光碟基板之位置即使有偏移時,亦可以利 用夾嘴6 8之作用進行軸心之成為同軸。 被搬運到光碟積層/分離裝置D之光碟10接受下列方 式之處理。第9圖表示光碟積層/分離裝置D所使用之 光碟保持器7之構造。另外,該光碟保持器7之構造是 在光碟基板取出區域R1和ΙΠ1使用相同構造者(參照第1 圖)。 在第9圖中,符號70是基台,71是設立在基台70之心 軸,72是沿著心軸71升降之升降台。被同軸搬蓮裝置6 最初搬運之光碟10被移載到位於光碟積層/分離裝置D 之第1位置11之光碟保持器7 。這時,在光碟保持器7 中,在升降台72上已配置剛體碟8 ,被搬蓮到之光碟10 -37- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I _ 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4 ) 裝載在該剛體碟8上。然後,升降台7 2下降到使心軸7 1 之前端從該光碟10突出後,利用剛體碟搬蓮裝置12 (參 照第1圔),將下一個之剛體碟8裝載在該光碟10之上 。在這種情況,剛體碟8是供給位於第4位置1 3 (參照 第1圖)之積層在光碟保持器7上者。 剛體碟8是厚度2niin之A1製之碟,為著避免與光碟10 之環狀突起部l〇b互相干擾,所以形成有璟狀溝8b。剛 體碟8之外徑被設定成為小於光碟10之外徑。其理由是 在構成光碟10之光碟基板之外周緣部,當射出成形時會 産生毛邊,利用此種方式用來避免該毛邊和剛體碟8之 互相干擾。 依照上逑之方式將剛體碟8配置在光碟10上,使升降 台72同樣的下降,用來將被搬蓮之光碟10裝載在剛體碟 8上。經由重複此種動作,在位於第1位置11 (參照第 1圖)之光碟保持器7 ,積層指定Η數之光碟10。在此 階段,正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物未展延在2片光碟 基板間之全面。 然後,驅動第1圖所示之輸送帶14,將裝載有光碟10 成為積層狀態之光碟保持器7搬運到第5位置15,在該 處將光碟放置至經過指定之時間。在這期間使正離子型 紫外線硬化性組成物過渡到該2片光碟基板間之全面, 藉以完成展延處理。 在完成展延之後,將裝載有光碟10之光碟保持器7搬 運到端面硬化處理裝置Ε内,藉以進行端面硬化處理。 -3 8 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .- 線, 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β 和内 ’室 室溫 溫恆 恆該 之在 示 , 顯置 未裝 中熱 圖加 有之 備等 具器 E 熱 置加 裝之 理内 處室 化溫 硬恆 面在 端設 該被 進 來 用 間 時 之 定 指 持 保 碟 光 之 態 狀 層 積 。 之理 後處 理化 處硬 延面 展端 將行 外例 理體 處具 溫其 加 示 了表 除圖 ο f 1X 述第 所 。 前法 如方 理之 處線 化外 硬紫 面 射 端照 該用 ,使 L— ίΛ 夕iy 另可 亦 旋射 10照 碟之 光線 fee k— 使夕 態紫 狀該 之 。 層線 積外 以紫 , 射 後照 之73 理置 處裝 延射 展照 成線 完外 在紫 ,從 即和 亦轉 和¾ ο 1X ο 碟圍 光包 在以 ,加 外板 另射 〇 反 射以 照好 式最 光 , 閃圍 或周 射之 ί、 3 照 7 式置 續裝 連射 用照 使線 以外 可紫 起 突 狀 璟 之 ο 1Χ 磲 光 和 8 碟 體 剛 了 略 省 中 圔 ο 第 該 在 己 -fn 之 濕較 之化 中硬 氣其 空份 於部 由之 易觸 容接 很氣 物濕 成之 組中 性氣 化空 硬與 線 , 外阻 紫受 型化 子硬 離其 正使 度 以射 所照 ,線 態外 狀紫 之行 粘進 粘面 之端 化對 硬或 未理 為處 成溫 會加 同行 不進 之之 況式 情方 照述 依上 , 用 慢利 光 之 ο 1X 碟 光 有 載 裝 將 後 之 m 二 理 處 化 i y 碩 面 端 ci 種 〇此 效行 有進 常在 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 搬被 該到 , 配 17分 置別 位分 2 8 第碟 該體 在剛 0 和 7 ο 1 1 置碟 位光 2 之 第畳 到重 蓮替 搬交 7 將 器 2 持置 保裝 碟蓮 7 碟 器光 持之 保上 碟 7 光器 之持 18保 置碟 位光 3 之 第置 和位 3 R 2 域第 區 , 査式 檢方 &amp;ΠΝ 1 碟種 光這 在用 置利 配 第 7 和器 3 R 持 域保 區碟 査光 檢之 碟17 光置 到位 載 2 移第 被 , 別 7 分器 部持 全保 成碟 變光 8 之 8 碟 1 體置 剛位 和 3 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) L--------------------訂---------線 ------^---. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(w) 成為變空狀態。另外一方面,這時在第3位置18之光碟 保持器7上積層指定量之剛體碟8 。 在此種狀態,經由驅動輸送帶14,可以使第2位置17 之光碟保持器7移動到第3位置1 8,和使第3位置1 8之 光碟保持器7移動到第4位置1 3。然後,其後續到達第 2位置17之光碟保持器7上所裝載之剛體碟8被搬運裝 置2移載到被移動至第3位置之空的光碟保持器7上。 另外,在使光碟10和剛體碟8交替重叠時,將移動到第 4位置1 3之光碟保持器7所裝載之剛體碟8裝載在位於 第1位置11之光碟保持器7上。 經由將剛體碟8從第4位置1 3移載到第1位置1 1,當 第4位置13之光碟保持器7成為變空狀態時,就使該空 的光碟保持器7移動到第1位置1 1。這時,第1位置1 1 之光碟保持器7移動到第5位置1 5。 在上述之DVD之製造裝置中,剛體碟8從第1位置11 經由第2位置17,第3位置18和第4位置13後再度到達 第1位置1 1藉以再利用。因此,可以使有限Μ數之剛體 碟8有效的運用,藉以降低裝置之成本。 另外,對於光碟保持器7亦同樣的,利用輸送帶1 4將 其從第1位置1 1經由第2位置1 7,第3位置1 8,和第4 位置,搬運回到第1位置1 1,因此光碟保持器7可以在 光碟積層/分離裝置D進行循環和再利用,和可以使有 限台數之光碟保持器7有效的蓮用。在這種情況,假如 在第1 ,第2 ,第3 ,第4位置11, 17, 18, 13各配置 -40- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一-口,«. -線. A7 470952 _B7_ 五、發明說明(巧) 一台之光碟保持器7時,則在從第4位置1 3到第1位置 1 1之進行剛體碟8之移載作業之期間,可以同時進行從 第3位置18到第4位置13之剛體碟8之移載作業,可以 用來提髙生産效率。 另外,假如在該第1位置1 1和第2位置1 7之間之第5 位置15配置光碟保持器7 ,在該第5位置進行展延處理 時,則可以在進行上述之移載作業之間,同時進行展延 處理,可以更進一步的提高生産效率。 另外,假如在第1位置1 1和第2位置1 7之間之第6位 置16配置光碟保持器7 ,在該第6位置16進行加熱處理 時,則可以在進行上述之移載作業之期間進行端面硬化 處理,可以更進一步的提高生産效率。 另外,使第5位置1 5和第6位置1 6進行比較,當該第 5位置1 5位於第1位置1 1側時,在展延工程後可以使正 離子型紫外線硬化性組成物立即硬化,可以使其後之光 碟10之手工操作變為容易。 將根據實施例用來說明本發明。 〈實施例1 y 120mm ,内徑36«之聚碩酸酯作為基板,使用 2片形成有厚度80n m之A1膜之DVD用光碟基板,利用正 離子型紫外線硬化性組成物進行阽合。 在使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物落下到光碟基板時 ,使用第4圖和第5圖所示之裝置。 分配器(噴嘴)41使用美國EFD公司之型號1500DV(噴嘴 -4 1- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------訂·-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) « 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(心) 器長 電光 崎發 岩 , 國 W 本3k 曰出 用輸 使有 42具 置, 裝31 射L 照3-線MO 外燈 紫素 〇 鹵 } 屬 Inm金 26之 ο 製 徑司 内公 之用 燈利 對以 ,可 In C 3 5 S 2 台 度轉 件 條 之 m C / W ο 2 1X 為 量 能 入 輸 轉 旋 行 進 達 馬 之 示 顯 未 中 画 旋紫 L1 ^ 夕 夕 另另 物子 成離 組正 性之 化下 硬落· 線和 外置 紫裝 型射 子照 離線 正外 之紫 下 , 落外 和另 2 4 , 置 e 裝50 射為 照離 線距 外之 示 顯 未 中 圖 /V Ο 板性 射一 反均 以之 , 射 圍照 周線 之外 物紫 成高 組提 性以 化藉 碩 , 線圍 外包 紫以 型加 線 卜 a 夕 P 紫ΟΠΙ 型 2 : 子度脂 離粘樹 正之氧 分\璟I jying gas) is used to dissipate the liquid volume. ^ I (3) using a positive displacement pump (a representative example is the "single automatic distributor" trade name; made by the Japanese national soldiers equipment company) for positive ions Type purple \ external sclerosing composition 45 is ejected. After the ejection is completed, make the pump apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) at -34- this paper size. 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (W) Rotate in the direction opposite to the ejection direction to store the liquid volume in the nozzle 41. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page.) It is best to make this positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45 recyclable. As described above, the first optical disc substrate 1a coated with the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 is formed in a loop to overlap the second optical disc substrate 1b in the stacking device 5. The overlapping of two disc substrates will be described below with reference to FIG. 6. In FIG. 6, the structure of the overlapping device 5 includes: a pair of disc substrate holding tables 51, 52; a hinge 53 for connecting the holding tables 51, 52, and a suction path 5 4 connected to Vacuum pump shown. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the first optical disc substrate la coated with a positive-shaped positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 45 coated on the optical disc substrate holding table 51 is mounted on the optical disc substrate holding table 51, and The disc substrate holding table 52 mounts the second disc substrate 1b. The vacuum pump (not shown) is driven to suck the first and second disc substrates la, lb through the suction path 54 to the disc substrate holding tables 51, 52, respectively. Then, from the state shown in Fig. 6 (a), the disc substrate holding table 51 is rotated around the hinge 53 at high speed. Before the state of the sixth (b), if the disc substrate holding table 51 approaches the disc substrate holding table 52, the rotation speed is reduced, and then controlled to 1 second, the two discs are approached at a unit speed, and then When the interval between the first and second optical disc substrates la, lb becomes a desired value, the approach is stopped, and the driving of the vacuum pump is stopped. The overlapped optical discs 10 are moved to the next one through the coaxial carrying device 6 ~ 3 5-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. The disc stacking / separating device D of the invention description (W). FIG. 7 shows the main parts of the coaxial lotus device 6 and their functions. As shown in FIG. 7, the configuration of the coaxial lotus device 6 includes: an air circulation path 64; a disc-shaped vacuum suction portion 62 provided at the front end thereof; and a cylindrical air pickup portion 63 from the vacuum The central part of the lower surface of the suction part 62 protrudes. The air pick-up portion 63 is made of rubber, and the inside thereof is hollow. In addition, the supply path 64a of the air circulation path 64 leads to an air supply device not shown in the figure, and the suction path 64b leads to a vacuum pump not shown in the figure. The air is supplied to the hollow portion of the air pick-up portion 63 through the supply path 64a, and its path cannot be changed. In addition, the coaxial lotus transfer device 6 arranges the lotus transfer path 9 of Fig. 1 so as to be reciprocally movable. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the coaxial lotus device 6 places the overlapping discs 10 in contact with the vacuum suction unit 62 for vacuum suction. Next, when air is supplied into the air pick-up portion 63 having a smaller aperture than the hole portion 10a of the optical disc 10, the diameter is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the holes of the optical disc 10 are uniformly pressed from the inside. Department 10a. In this way, even when the axes of the first optical disk substrate 1a and the second optical disk substrate 1b are shifted, the axial centers can be made coaxial. In this state, the coaxial lotus transfer device 6 is moved along the lotus transfer path 9 to the disc stacking / separating device D, and is used to make the disc substrates la, 1 b of the disc 1G transferred to the disc stacking / separating device D. The axis becomes coaxial. In this optical disc moving device, a chuck can also be used as a device for making the shaft center coaxial, thereby replacing the air pick-up section. Figure 8 (a) is an oblique view showing the disc of the second embodiment -36- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again) _Installed 470952 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (g) Lotus Transfer Device, Figures 8 (b) and 8 (c) are enlarged views of the mouthpiece. The optical transfer device 6 is roughly composed of a vacuum suction unit 67 (holding device), a chuck 68 (coaxial device), and an arm 69. As shown in Fig. 8 (a), the disc transport device 6 is structured such that a disc-shaped vacuum suction portion 67 is provided at the tip of the arm 69. The chuck 68 projects from a lower center portion of the vacuum suction portion 67. The arm 69 is constructed so as to be able to rotate around the end portion of the arm 69 which is not provided with the vacuum suction portion 67, using a driving mechanism not shown in the figure. The front end of the chuck 68 is shaped as shown in the eighth drawing, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the hole portion IQa of the optical disc 10. When the chuck 68 is inserted into the hole IGa and the chuck 68 is operated, as shown in Fig. 8 (c), the claw portion is enlarged, and the hole Ida of the optical disc 10 is uniformly pressed from the inside. In this way, even when the positions of the two disc substrates constituting the disc 10 are shifted, the axis can be made coaxial by the action of the chuck 68. The optical disc 10 transferred to the optical disc stacking / separating device D is subjected to the following processing. Fig. 9 shows the structure of the disc holder 7 used in the disc stacking / separating device D. In addition, the structure of the disc holder 7 uses the same structure in the disc substrate take-out areas R1 and IΠ1 (see FIG. 1). In Fig. 9, reference numeral 70 is a base, 71 is a mandrel set on the base 70, and 72 is a lifting table which moves up and down along the mandrel 71. The optical disc 10 initially carried by the coaxial moving device 6 is transferred to the optical disc holder 7 located at the first position 11 of the optical disc stacking / separating device D. At this time, in the disc holder 7, the rigid body disc 8 has been arranged on the lifting table 72, and the disc 10 to which it has been moved is placed.-This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ( Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) I _ 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Loaded on the rigid disc 8. Then, the lifting table 7 2 is lowered until the front end of the mandrel 7 1 protrudes from the optical disc 10, and then the next rigid disc 8 is mounted on the optical disc 10 by using a rigid disc carrying device 12 (refer to Section 1). . In this case, the rigid body disc 8 is supplied to the disc holder 7 which is laminated on the fourth position 13 (see FIG. 1). The rigid body disc 8 is a disc made of A1 with a thickness of 2 niin. In order to avoid interference with the annular protrusion 10b of the optical disc 10, a sulcus groove 8b is formed. The outer diameter of the rigid disc 8 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the optical disc 10. The reason is that burrs are generated during the injection molding at the outer peripheral portion of the disc substrate constituting the optical disc 10. This method is used to prevent the burrs and the rigid body 8 from interfering with each other. The rigid body disc 8 is arranged on the optical disc 10 in the same manner as above, and the lifting table 72 is lowered similarly, so as to load the disc 10 to be carried on the rigid disc 8. By repeating this operation, the disc holder 7 located at the first position 11 (refer to FIG. 1) is stacked with the designated number of discs 10. At this stage, the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition did not extend across the entire surface of the two optical disc substrates. Then, the conveyor 14 shown in FIG. 1 is driven, and the disc holder 7 loaded with the optical disc 10 in a laminated state is transferred to the fifth position 15 and the disc is placed there for a predetermined time. During this period, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is transitioned to the entire surface between the two optical disc substrates, thereby completing the stretching process. After the completion of the stretching, the disc holder 7 on which the optical disc 10 is loaded is transported to the end surface hardening treatment apparatus E to perform the end surface hardening treatment. -3 8-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) .- Thread, 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β and The internal temperature of the room's room should be indicated by the temperature and constant temperature. The installed equipment such as the medium heat map is not installed. The principle of the internal heating temperature of the room is set at the end. Definitely refers to the state of stratification of the disk. The post-processing of the hardened surface of the hardened surface will be treated as an example. The f 1X is described above. The former method is like the formula. The reason is to use the outer hard purple surface to shoot the end, so that L— ίΛ Xi iy can also shoot the light of 10 discs fee k— to make the evening state purple. It should be purple. The rear view of the 73 place is installed to extend the extension of the photo into the line to complete the external purple, from now and then to turn and ¾ ο 1X ο enclosing the light around the plate, plus another shot 〇 reflection to reflect the best light, flash Circumference or weekly shots, 3 photos, 7-style continuous shooting photos can be purple outside the line Sudden 璟 ο 1 × 磲 光 and 8 discs have been slightly saved in the province 圔 ο should be hard in the ji-fn compared with the hard gas, its empty parts are easily touched by the wet gas group Neutral gasification is hard and linear, the external resistance purple acceptor is hard away from it, so that the degree of radiation is illuminated, and the line of the external purple line sticks to the end of the sticky surface, which is hard or ignored. It will add the situation that the company does not enter the situation. According to the above description, use the slow light ο 1X disc light to load the m after the second treatment iy master face ci species. This effect is often in the wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The property bureau employee consumer cooperative printed and moved to this place, with 17 points to place 2 8th disc. The body was just at 0 and 7 ο 1 1 to set the second position of the light 2 to Zhonglian to hand over 7 2 Holding and holding a disc 7 Holding a disc 7 Holding a disc 7 Holding an optical disc 18 Holding a disc 3 Position 3 R 2 Domain and area, Check type inspection &amp; ΠΝ 1 Disc type The light is in the disk with the 7th and the 3R holding area. The disc inspection light inspection disc 17 is set in place. 2 moved to the quilt, the 7th branch of the division holds the full-guaranteed dish, 8 8 discs, 1 disc set, 3 positions, this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) L-- ------------------ Order --------- line ------ ^ ---. (Please read the notes on the back before filling (This page) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of Invention (w) becomes empty. On the other hand, at this time, a predetermined amount of the rigid body disc 8 is laminated on the disc holder 7 at the third position 18. In this state, by driving the conveyor belt 14, the disc holder 7 at the second position 17 can be moved to the third position 18, and the disc holder 7 at the third position 18 can be moved to the fourth position 13. Then, the rigid disc 8 loaded on the optical disc holder 7 which subsequently reaches the second position 17 is transferred to the empty optical disc holder 7 which has been moved to the third position. When the disc 10 and the rigid disc 8 are alternately overlapped, the rigid disc 8 loaded on the disc holder 7 moved to the fourth position 13 is mounted on the disc holder 7 positioned at the first position 11. By transferring the rigid disc 8 from the fourth position 13 to the first position 11 when the disc holder 7 of the fourth position 13 becomes empty, the empty disc holder 7 is moved to the first position 1 1. At this time, the disc holder 7 in the first position 11 is moved to the fifth position 15. In the above-mentioned DVD manufacturing apparatus, the rigid body disc 8 passes from the first position 11 through the second position 17, the third position 18, and the fourth position 13 to the first position 11 again for reuse. Therefore, the rigid disk 8 with a limited number of M can be effectively used, thereby reducing the cost of the device. In addition, the same is applied to the disc holder 7, and it is transported from the first position 11 to the second position 17, the third position 18, and the fourth position by the conveyor belt 14 to the first position 11 1 Therefore, the disc holder 7 can be recycled and reused in the disc stacking / separating device D, and can be used for a limited number of disc holders 7 effectively. In this case, if the configuration is 1, 17, 18, 13 in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th positions-40-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) One-mouth, «. -Line. A7 470952 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (Clever) When the disc holder 7 of one unit is in the position from the 4th position to the 13th position During the transfer operation of the rigid disc 8 at the first position 11, the transfer operation of the rigid disc 8 from the third position 18 to the fourth position 13 can be performed simultaneously, which can be used to improve production efficiency. In addition, if the disc holder 7 is arranged at the fifth position 15 between the first position 11 and the second position 17 and the extension processing is performed at the fifth position, the above-mentioned transfer operation can be performed. At the same time, the extension processing can be carried out at the same time, which can further improve the production efficiency. In addition, if the disc holder 7 is arranged at the sixth position 16 between the first position 11 and the second position 17 and the heat treatment is performed at the sixth position 16, the above-mentioned transfer operation can be performed. The end surface hardening treatment can further improve the production efficiency. In addition, the fifth position 15 and the sixth position 16 are compared. When the fifth position 15 is located on the first position 11 side, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition can be cured immediately after the stretching process. It can make manual operation of the subsequent disc 10 easy. The present invention will be explained based on examples. <Example 1 y 120mm, a polyacrylate having an inner diameter of 36 «was used as a substrate, and two DVD optical disc substrates formed with an A1 film having a thickness of 80 nm were bonded using a positive ion ultraviolet curable composition. When dropping a positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition onto a disc substrate, the apparatus shown in Figs. 4 and 5 was used. The distributor (nozzle) 41 uses the model 1500DV (nozzle-4 1-) of the EFD company in the United States. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). ------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) «Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (Heart) The Controller of the Electric Light Sataki, Japan In 3k, there are 42 units for output, with 31 shots of L according to 3-wire MO, external lamp purple halogen 0 halogen} belongs to Inm gold 26 of ο the diameter of the company's internal use of light, can be In C 3 5 The m C / W ο 2 1X of the S 2 table transfer piece is the amount of energy that can be entered, the rotation is advanced, the display of the Dama is not shown in the picture, and the rotation is purple L1. The drop line and the external purple-mounted shooter are taken under the purple line directly outside the line, the fall and the other 2 4 are set, and the e-equipment 50 shot is shown as the off-line display. / V oon In this way, shooting around the outside line of the surrounding line Zicheng Gao group to improve the nature of the borrowing, the line around the purple line to increase the line a Xi P purple ΠΠ Type 2: Sub viscosity of the fat from the positive oxygen partial tree \ Jing

Be 硬 2 /ίχ 脂 樹 之 性)&lt; 化°c 成 合 組 之 列 下 有 具 用 使 物 成 組 份份 ο ο 7 3 : :..劑 4 2 始 1 2 I 3 6 D&amp; X XS. E E 合 製製聚 業業光 Η 工之 成成型 化化合 /解解聚 :克克子 β. s 0 男 截 正 4口 轉 旋 之 置 裝 份之 2 示 :所 ο 圖 9 9 4 6 I 第 UV在 製載 et&quot;ΜΕ 司裝 公la 多板 利基 克碟 歐光 利將 優 當 性每 化是 硬量 線下 外落 樊 ο 型面 子表 離之 , a 正 1 使板 時基 同碟 ,光 轉到 旋下 3 落 4口 狀 轉環 旋以 5 使 4 ,物 後成 之組 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) «裝 . -線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ,碟 力光 壓在 之置 出位 吐下 4 落 器 。 配 扭 分 A 從0〇 整為 調成 , 度 g 厚 7 J 2 均 ο 平 為之 板後 基合 碟阽 光使 片來 一 用 硬之 線延 外展 紫側 型徑 子外 離和 正側 使徑 置内 位之 該la 。板 置基 位碟 之光 &amp;1ΙΠ向 80® 徑之 直物 之成 la組 板性 基化 紫 使 間 期 之 下 落 5 4 物 成 組 性 化 0 線 外 C 紫 等型 相子 為離 成正 離在 距 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(w ) 外線照射裝置42以上逑之條件進行發光,用來將紫外線 照射在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物。 依照上逑之方式準備2片塗布有環狀之正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物之光碟基板,使塗布有環狀之正離子型 紫外線硬化性組成物之面互相面對後進行重驀。在重疊 時氣泡會很容易捲入正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物中, 但是經由使樹脂間之接觸面積逐漸增加的重疊可以用來 防止氣泡之捲入。 在本實施例中以第11圖表示其概念,在S外一方之光 碟基板la對一方之光碟基板lb成為傾斜之狀態,使正離 子型紫外線硬化性組成物之間互相接觸,然後使光碟基 板la,lb之間成為平行的下降,用來使逐漸落下之樹脂 之間以全周接觸和進行展延。經由調整該上側光碟基板 la之下降速度,可以使氣泡完全不會捲入。 在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之展延後,將2片之 光碟基板如第11圖所示的裝載在板74上,以600mJ/cin2 之紫外線從上方照射。在第11圖中,因為在板7 4之表面 設有用以反射紫外線之反射膜74a ,和在光碟基板la之 上部設有遮蔽板75,所以從上方照射之紫外線如圖中之 箭頭所示,集中在重叠後之光碟基板la之端面。正離子 型紫外線硬化性組成物很容易由於空氣中之濕度使其硬 化受阻,與空氣中之濕氣接觸之部份其硬化較慢,依照 情況之不同會有未硬化之粘粘之狀態,所以利用本實施 例之對端面進行紫外線照射之方式極為有效。 在大約10分鐘後使光碟基板間之正離子型紫外線硬化 -4 3 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(〇 ) RH 0 面 端 是 但 離 剝 易 容 不 板 基 碟 光 片 〇 2 態 ,狀 化之 膠粘 物粘 成持 組保 性份 落紫 剝型 不子 為離 成正 ,察 化觀 0C 硬 , 之離 當剝 相行 行進 進板 面基 端碟 ,光 後 Η 鐘 2 分對 2 一昆 約 。 大態 在狀 之 51 的 樣 1 園 ηϋκρ 全 時 況 。 狀泡 著氣 接和 和份 匕 β 硬化 之硬 物未 成有 組到^ 性察' 化觀 硬未 線 外化 例 施 實 成 ,圔 形板 4 面基第 表碟用 板光使 基之的 製用樣 酯 D 同 酸DV1 碩之例 聚片施 之纟實 IQtn成與 3 製 , 徑來板 内用基 ,膜碟 HA1光 ΟΠΙ之 Η 12度一 \徑厚之 π之中 Is其 180在 狀。利 環8g之 成 G 面 布約後 塗大在 物為 。 成成置 組量位 性下之 化落mm 硬使65 線力徑 外壓直 紫之之 型出la 子吐板 離41基 正器碟 以配光 置分在 裝從置 之整位 示調下 所 。落 ,適 時定 延選 展式 物方 成此 組以 性 , 化面 硬全 線之 外間 紫la 型板 子基 離碟 正光 使在 法延 膜展 α 塗其置 轉使位 旋以之 用可當 後型 之子 狀離 環正 為之 成狀 下璟 落對 物面 成面 組著 性接 化之 硬板 線基 外碟 紫光 型之 子 Η 離一 正外 使另 當使 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 畳 0B1I ί 一了 7/1 進 的 面 下 落 物 成 組 性 化 硬η-1 線ml 外00 紫40 轉 旋 以 後 畳 重 ί 在 組 性 化 碩 線 外 紫 型 子 離 正 使 來 用 實 與 化 0C 之 面 端 碟 。光 間之 之 Η 板 1 基成 碟疊 6 之進 片促 2 箸 在為 延 , 展後 物然 成 紫有 射具 反在 以載 用裝 置la 設板 面基 表碟 在光 ,將 示方 所上 圖在 12和 第 , 如 a 4 , 7 的膜 樣射 同反 1 之 例線 施外 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(〇 ) 第成 如構 線之 外置 紫裝 〇 射 線照 外該 紫’ 射射 照照 的置 式裝 光射 閃照 ,線 上外 4 7 紫 板以 之, 75示 板所 蔽圖 遮12 徑 管 有 具 含 包 為 約 大 度 長 光 發 效 有 圓 之 瓜 1 Q F 之 製 司 公 機 電 歐 西 屋 /—\ 6 7 燈 光 閃 氙 之 形 條 長 狀 筒 件未 條中 射圆 /#ν 照 Ο L 8 7 體電 框和 之 C 等量 該容 納電 收之 以器 用容 和電 ,之 77路 板電 I? 反放 , 節 M/ 型是 波 脈 之 流 電 電 放 來 用 每 為 成 量 能 入 輸 之 燈 使 示壓 顯電 Η田 為 成 度 燈 個 電之 充秒 節 / 調次 5 5 秒以 微 , 板 基 碟 光 和 6 7 燈 光 閃 氙 該 外 另 ο 次 ο 11 ο 射 a 照40 度為 S 0 複距 重之 外碟 紫光 c 型之失 子到消 離察部 正觀全 察所致 觀 1 大 ,例後 後施射 之實照 射,光 照況閃 光狀在 閃化態 之硬狀 線之之 外物粘 紫成粘 之組之 述性份 上化部 在硬面 線端 ,則 後 , 鐘化 分 _ 0 J 1 物 約成 大組 到性 起化 疊硬 重線 A1 I L— 從夕 ,紫 法型 膜子 塗離 轉正 。 旋之離 用間剝 利板易 ,基容 外碟不 另光成 使變 察現 觀發 板況 基狀 碟著 光接 之 / 片化 2 0 該之 離物 Hu 制組 強性 ,化 後硬 鐘線 分外 2 紫 約型 大子 在離 正 --------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 泡 氣 和 份 部 化 硬 未 有 到 察 觀 未 化 碩 的 樣 一 體 全 例 施 實 另 之 一了 進 所 果 效 之 明ΙΠ, 發ΟΙη 本12 認徑 確外 以是 用板 明基 說之 將用 面使 下所 徑 内 驗 實 製 酯 酸 碩 聚 之 徑 内 基 碟 e 光0B1 之10 用徑 VD外 D 之扭, 膜201 A1度 之厚 厚成 nraH 80加 有轉 成旋 形以 面用 表使 板碟 基體 在剛 之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 · _B7_ 五、發明說明(〇 ) 15 . 2mia之純A1製中空碟。 另外,正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物使用以加氫雙酚 A二縮小甘油酸6 0份,1,6 -己烷二醇二縮水甘油醚 (阪本藥品公司製之「16H_ DGE」低氯品,全氯量=0.2 重量% ) 4 0份,光正離子聚合開始劑「R Η 0 D 0 R S I L PH0T0INITIAT0R2074」(路特亞公司製之4 -甲苯- 4-U -甲基乙基)苯碘鏘四(五氟苯)硼酸鹽)0 . 5份,矽油 「L 7 6 0 4」(日本有尼卡公司製)0 · 2份,在6 0 °C進行1小 時之混合溶解所形成者,其粘度為226mPas(25°C)。另 外,該加氫雙酚A二縮小甘油醚之獲得是使雙酚A二縮 小甘油醚(大日本油墨化學工業公司製之「葉匹克龍850S 」全氯量=0. 14重量% )在存在有釕觸媒之條件下,以氫 在4 0 k g / c ffl 35,溫度4 Q °C進行7小時之加氳。 在該光碟基板上,使用上逑之美國EFD公司之型號 150GDV(噴嘴内徑G.83min),使該正離子型紫外線硬化性 組成物落下和塗布成璟狀,用來使其塗布量成為〇」g。 紫外線照射裝置4 2使用優盛公司製之紫外線照射裝置 I 2 5 0型,D燈(發光長度大約2 5 c m ),以最大輸出之7 0 % ------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Be hard 2 / ίχ the nature of the fat tree) &lt; chemical ° c There are useful ingredients in the composition group ο ο 7 3:: .. Agent 4 2 Start 1 2 I 3 6 D &amp; X XS EE Synthetic Polymerization Industry Guangye Gongcheng Formation Molding Compounding / De-agglomerating: 克克 子 β. S 0 Male cut 2 of 4 parts of the rotation, as shown in Figure 9 9 4 6 I The first UV in the production et &quot; ΜΕ company installed a multi-panel niche dish Ou Guangli will optimize the superiority every hard line below the surface of the fan, a positive face makes the plate time base the same, Light turns to spin down 3 drops 4 mouth-shaped swivel turns 5 to make 4 into groups (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) «installation.-Line. Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Cooperative It is printed, and the disc force light pressure spit out the 4 drop device. The torsion points A are adjusted from 0 to 60 degrees g thick and 7 J 2 are flat. After the plate is flat, the base is combined with the disc. The light comes out. The hard side is used to extend the purple side. Place the la in position. The light of the plate base plate &amp; 1 ΙΠ towards the 80® diameter of the straight group la laminar purple radicals to make the interphase fall 5 4 objects grouped to 0 0 off-line C purple isomorphic phase is positive The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (w) Outside irradiation device 42 or more It emits light and irradiates ultraviolet rays to a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition. Prepare two disc substrates coated with a ring-shaped positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition in the same manner as described above, and then re-roll the surfaces of the ring-shaped positive ion-type ultraviolet-curable composition facing each other. Air bubbles are easily involved in the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition during the superposition, but the superposition of the contact area between the resins can be used to prevent the air from being trapped. The concept is shown in FIG. 11 in this embodiment. The disc substrate 1a outside S is inclined to the disc substrate 1b on one side, the positive ion ultraviolet curable compositions are brought into contact with each other, and then the disc substrate La and lb become parallel declines, which are used to make the resins that fall gradually contact and spread all around. By adjusting the lowering speed of the upper disc substrate 1a, bubbles can be prevented from being caught at all. After the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition is stretched, two disc substrates are mounted on a plate 74 as shown in Fig. 11 and irradiated with ultraviolet rays of 600 mJ / cin2 from above. In FIG. 11, since a reflecting film 74a for reflecting ultraviolet rays is provided on the surface of the plate 74, and a shielding plate 75 is provided above the disc substrate 1a, the ultraviolet rays radiated from above are shown by arrows in the figure. Concentrate on the end faces of the superposed disc substrate la. The cation-type ultraviolet curable composition is easily blocked by the humidity in the air, and the part in contact with the moisture in the air will harden slowly. Depending on the situation, there will be an unhardened sticky state, so The method of irradiating the end face with ultraviolet rays in this embodiment is extremely effective. After about 10 minutes, the positive ion ultraviolet curing between the disc substrate is hardened-4 3-This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (〇) RH 0 The face end is but peeled off Yirong does not board the base disc optical film, the state of the sticky substance sticks into the holding group, the protective part is purple, and the peeling type is not positive, and the observation is 0C, and the peeling phase is advancing. At the base of the dish, after 2 minutes and 2 minutes of light. The overall state of sample η 状 κρ in state 1 of state 51. Shaped bubble gas connection and and parts dagger β curing of a hard object unpaired has set to ^ of observation 'of the concept of hard unbonded outside of embodiments applying the solid into, Ya plates 4 surface of the base of the table disc plate light the base of the system by Sample ester D with acid DV1 Master example Polyester Shiqian IQtn and 3 system, the base is used in the board, the film dish HA1 light 〇ΠΙΗ Η 12 degrees a \ diameter thickness π Is 180 which is in the state . 8g of the ring will be coated on the G surface. Set the size of the set to change the size of the mm, make the 65 line force diameter external pressure straight purple shape out of the la spit board away from the 41-based positive plate with light placement in the installation position Under the place. Fall, choose the exhibition type in a timely manner to form this group of properties, and change the surface of the entire hard surface. The purple la-type board base is separated from the dish, and the light is turned on. It can be used in the film extension of the film extension method. The shape of the ring is the shape of the ring, the bottom is falling, and the surface of the object is connected to the surface of the hard board line base. The outer disc of the purple type is Η. (Fill in this page again.). Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 0B1I ί A 7/1 surface drop is grouped into a hardened η-1 line ml outside 00 purple 40 after revolving. Out of the group, the purple pattern from the line is used to use real and chemical 0C face dish. The light between the light board 1 plate into a disc stack 6 into the film 2 to promote the film, as a result of the show, after the exhibition, it turned out to be a purple target with a load device la set the board surface of the base plate in the light, the display side Figures 12 and No., such as a 4 and 7 film sample shots are the same as the reverse example. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( 〇) The first step is to install the external purple device. The ray photo is outside the purple light. The external light flash is placed on the line. 4 and 7 purple plates are used on the line and outside. With a package containing a large length of light and a round melon, 1 QF, the company ’s electrical and mechanical Ouxi House /-\ 6 7 light flash xenon shaped strips long tube pieces shot round / # ν Photo 0 L 8 7 The volume of the electric box and the amount of C are equal to the capacity of the receiver. The 77-channel board I? Is reversed, and the section M / type is a pulsed current electric amplifier. The lost lamp makes the display voltage of Putian the second charge of Chengdu lamp. Times 5 5 seconds to micro, the board-based disc light and 6 7 lights flash Xenon outside and ο times ο 11 ο shoot a according to 40 degrees S 0 at a distance of more than the distance from the disc purple light c type lost to the elimination inspection department The full observation caused by the full observation is a large one. After the example, the actual irradiation is applied later. The light flashes outside the flash-shaped hard line and the foreign matter sticks to purple. The upper part is hard. At the end of the upper thread, after that, Zhonghuafen _ 0 J 1 is roughly divided into a large group to sexually collapse the hard heavy line A1 IL—from the evening, the purple-type membrane is turned away. The spin-off is easy to peel off, and the outer plate of the base capacity is not changed. The base plate is connected to the light-emitting plate / sliced. 2 0 This off-line Hu system is strong. Hard clock line is extraordinarily special. 2 Ziyue Dazi is leaving .-------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page.) 0 Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau Consumer Consumption Cooperative printed gas bubbles and hardened parts, but did not reach the point where they did not look good. The whole example was implemented. The other has achieved results. Π, issued 〇Ιη this 12 is true According to Ban Mingji, the surface of the inner diameter of the ester and the inner diameter of the acidic disk is verified by using the surface. The light is 0B1 and 10 is the twist of the diameter VD and the outer D. The thickness of the film is 201 A1 and the thickness is nraH 80. Turn into a spiral shape and use a surface table to make the plate and the disc substrate conform to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) at the original paper size. 470952 A7 · _B7_ V. Description of the invention (〇) 15.2 pure A1 Making hollow discs. In addition, for the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition, 60 parts of hydrogenated bisphenol A diglyceride and 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether ("16H_DGE" low-chloride product manufactured by Sakamoto Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) were used. , Total chlorine content = 0.2% by weight) 40 parts, photocationic polymerization initiator "R Η 0 D 0 RSIL PH0T0INITIAT0R2074" (4-toluene-4-U-methylethyl) phenyliodine produced by Lutea Tetrakis (pentafluorobenzene) borate) 0.5 parts, silicone oil "L 7 6 0 4" (manufactured by Nika Corporation of Japan) 0 · 2 parts, formed by mixing and dissolving at 60 ° C for 1 hour, Its viscosity is 226 mPas (25 ° C). In addition, the hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether is obtained by making the bisphenol A diglycidyl ether ("Yepicron 850S" manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. has a total chlorine amount = 0.14% by weight). In the presence of a ruthenium catalyst, tritium was added at 40 kg / c ffl 35 at a temperature of 4 Q ° C for 7 hours. On this optical disc substrate, the model 150GDV (nozzle inner diameter G.83min) of the U.S. EFD company was used to drop and apply the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition in the shape of a tape to make the coating amount become 0. "G. Ultraviolet irradiating device 4 2 Use the UV irradiating device I 2 50 type manufactured by Yousheng company, D lamp (lighting length is about 25 cm), with 70% of the maximum output ------------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

訂---------線I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 成剛該展體 組在使始剛 性載,開在 化裝量物載 硬的重成裝 線示身組碟 外所本性得 紫圖之化獲 型 9 板硬所 子第基線將 離如碟外再 正碟光紫 , 有光之型上6-布該側子其-4 塗將上離在 未,於正載 C 與叠位之裝 射其重用間 8 照使板利板碟 行後基。基體 進布碟上碟剛 出塗光 CO 光將 輸在之碟片 。 之物體 2 延 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(从 光 之 Μη ο 6 層 積 來 用 業 作 之 榇 同 行 進 複 重 下。 以碟 〇 體 上剛 8 和 碟碟 後 碟 光 之 片 利 的 示徑 所管 圖用 ο ο Ϊ, 6 1 第第 7 層如置 積後裝 在然射 ,照Order --------- Line I Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The exhibit group is now rigidly loaded, and it is opened on the makeup line. The nature of the outside world is obtained from the purple map, and the 9th base of the hard board will be as bright as the outside of the dish, and then the light of the dish will be positive, and the light type will be 6-cloth. The positive load C and the stacked load shoot the reusable space 8 photos to make the plate and plate line the rear base. The substrate on the cloth feeding disc is just coated with CO light and will be lost to the disc. Object 2 Dimensions of this paper are in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (from the light of Μη ο 6 layers to use the work of the industry to make further progress . Use the diameter of the plate 8 and the light behind the plate to indicate the diameter of the plate. Ο ο Ϊ, 6 1 If the 7th layer is placed, it should be shot and photographed.

ο 1X m 鐘紫 分ao 5 處 置面 放端 下行 度進 溫射 之照 °c線 24外 在紫 , 用 m ο ο 2 約 大 度 長 光 發 效 有 - 之 Q 3 F 7 之置 製裝 司 射 公照 機線 電外 歐紫 西和 屋10 ί碟 燈光 光圍 閃包 氙板 之射 形反 條以 長 , 狀丨 筒 圓 之 型 圍量 周|£ 3¾ 是 件 條 射 照 電 Π 沪 芽 ο 5 C 6 量為 容成 之度 器幅 容波 電脈 之之 路流 15 鬣 道 It巨 ^ttr^itr 放放 節使 V\ 示 顯 未 中 圖 為 成 量 能 入 輸 燈 使 流 電 電 充 節 調 以 次 秒 7 外 軸紫 心 ί 使燈 是光 行閃 進氙 之使 射和 照 , 該轉 ,旋 外行 另進 Ο 度 次速 10之 射 圈 照 1 度轉置 速鐘裝 複秒射 重 2 照 之以線 為 成 離 距 之 ο 1—I 碟 光 和 化,外 LI 碩夕紫 線另型 外。子 紫的離 型粘正 子粘察 離之觀 正面 , 之端板 間有基 板到碟 基察光 碟觀之 光未 使全 ,{1兀 後 , 理化 處 _ 面物 端成 在組 3 性在 片 2 該 離 剝 後 鐘 分 ,處後 化面鐘 硬端分 的行 1 樣進過 一 未經 體於之 全對後 ,,疊 況外重 狀 DR 在 著 〇 , 接泡況 ,氣狀 化和化 硬份硬 之部其 物化察 成硬觀 組未亦 性到碟 化察光 硬觀之 線未理 ----------------------訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 之 粘 粘 為 成 物 成 組 性 化 ί彐y 硬 線 外 紫 型 子 離 正 之 面 端 碟 。 光態 ,狀 後 之 化 137 硬 全 完 物未 成估 組 評 性亦 化 , 硬外 線另 外 。 紫況 型情獲 子形件 離變條 正之同 在碟相 光逑 例 較 土 /—\ 碟 光 之 得 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 估 評 上未 與和 以碟 之體 碟剛 體用 剛使 用未 使 , 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(心) 具有環狀凸部之平面光碟之以與上述相同條件獲得之光 碟(比較例2 ),和展延完成後,經由剛體碟重壘光碟之 以與上述相同條件獲得之光碟(比較例3 )等之變形情況 。該評估使用本發明人等掲示在日本國專利案特開平 10-32G838號之方法。其結果如第13圖所示。 由第13圔可以明白,在使用有剛體碟之實施例3中, 當與比較例比較時,其彎曲角成為較低之值。恃別是半 徑方向之彎曲角,在實施例中為上面0.32° ,下面0.29° ,與此相對的,在比較例1中,光碟上下面均為G. 69° ,在比較例2中,上面為0.48° ,下面為0.46° ,在比 較例3中,上面為0.65° ,下面為0.67° ,因此可以得 知對於防止半徑方向之彎曲具有很大之效果。另外,由 於重疊位置所産生之彎曲角之大小之傾向則不能確定。 另外,使實施例和比較例3比較可以得知要防止彎曲 時需要在靜置平坦面上進行展延處理。亦即,在完成展 延之時刻所發生之彎曲,要在其後加以消除極為困難。 另外,依照DVD-RAM之規格之要求,半徑方向之彎曲角 為0.7°以下,圓周方向之彎曲角為0.3°以下。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 另外,依照比較例2之結果可以確認即使是沒璟狀凸 部之光碟,當將多Η重叠時,因為不形成靜置平坦面, 所以彎曲角會變大。 第14圖表示根據上逑之評估所獲得之資料所顯示之光 碟之外觀形狀。在第14圖中,(a)是依照本實施例,(b) 是依照比較例1之光碟之外觀形狀。S外,兩者均表示 -4 8 -本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(ο ) 光碟上面之評估結果。 在第14(a),(b)圖中,以虛線表示没有彎曲和理想之 光碟之外觀形狀,以實線(螺旋狀)表示所評估之光碟之 外觀形狀,依照本實施例之光碟被判定為具有彎曲較小 之近似理想之光碟之外觀形狀。 第15圖表示利用體積式計量正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物用來進行塗布之方法。在第15圖中,符號80是台座 ,用來固定塗布裝置,81是塗布裝置之氣缸部,84是動 力源(馬達)。90是支柱,與氣缸部形成一體用來安裝該 馬達。82是可以上下往復蓮動之心軸,83是密封用之0 環,用來防止正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物洩漏到上方 。8 7是儲存槽,用來儲存正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 ,88是液體狀態之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物,89是 配管,用來將液體之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物引導 到塗布裝置。 符號85是吸入閥,當吸入正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物時被開放,85b表示以85c作為起點之閥之開狀態,和 85b表示以85c為起點之閥之閉狀態。 符號8 6是吐出閥,當吐出正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物時被開放,86b表示以86c為起點之閥之開狀態,和 85a表示以86c為起點之閥之閉狀態。 吸入閥8 5和吐出閥8 6所具有之構造均是利用圖中未顯 示之彈簧之力量經常維持閉狀態。 正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之被吸入到氣缸81内之 -49- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------I-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 11111 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(W ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 置85立子方態 軸B)於 維開 組氣2)十 物 所 裝面閥Μ 離一狀 成心&quot;位^0量現 性照Ζ«Ι成 , 布之入 C 正外閉 達之。85i 力實 化依1-體 組 上 塗合吸85,另持 之置㈠閥Μ 之以 硬是U㈣ 性 體 置接,置放。維。出裝面入 簧可 線¾)差頃 化。A 口 位物中位開導量“吐布之吸以彈以 外 W源㈣。硬述S Z2成作閉被引力 t 之塗合為it之所 紫 r 水A1布線所在 於組動在以被之丨物之接因 示, 型 I 之^; 塗外下布 位性入持所側簧漏成Z1物 顯大 子1«面¾之紫如塗 初化吸保大87彈洩組於成中㈣未其 離(«液’物型由要 當硬該被其槽之體性位組作 u 中比 正量接72成子理物 使線在量比存示液化初性動 D 圖力 之布逑和組離之成 ,外。力力儲顯生硬常化出^; 用動 作塗上Z1性正量組0- 用紫置之動從未發線使硬吐 h 利驅 動為之定化布計性-5 作型位簧驅物中會外,線該TTP86之 行因82設硬塗積化 之子之彈之成圖不紫用外在卩面軸 進,塞先線造體硬 84離Z1之軸組用時型作紫 出心 式中活預外構行線 達正到示心性利作子之型置ίι吐是 方置和由紫之進外 馬與動顯為化86動離84子位 Μ ,但 Μ 逑裝積經型述先紫 用之 m 未因硬閥入正達離之 a 面 上布面以子上預型 利82®)中是線出吸,馬正7285方態 U 照塗剖所離用要子 是軸纟圖但外吐以次用與到置一狀86依之之,正利,離 夜 1 成心 Η 用,紫,所其利之動位外閉之在物 8 積之在前正 達之(ί利置型面 , 是82移閉另持放 成缸之量 之 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 470952 B7 五、發明說明(49 ) 以要成為液狀(液體),液體之粘度之溫度特性一般産生 被稱為阿列里烏斯(Arrhenius)型之指數函數之變化。 亦卽具有對溫度之變化率很大之特擻。 可以使用閥式之分配器,但是因為使用依照閥之開閉 時用來控制吐出量之方式,所以會受塗布之液體之粘度 之影響,吐出量會隨著環境溫度産生很大之變化為其缺 點。 實質上,璟境溫度變高時,粘度降低因而使吐出量增 加,會有超過預設量之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物吐 出。相反的,當璟境溫度變低時吐出量就減少,變成吐 出比預設量少之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物。 因為吐出量與溫度具有相關性,其結果是對貼合體之 塗布量亦與溫度具有相關性,所以會有在2片之光碟基 板間不能形成完全之接著層之事態發生。 然而如上所逑,因為預先體積式的計量正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物,所以經由採用經由分配器噴嘴吐出之 方式,完全不會産生上逑之事態,可以實現高産量之工 程。對正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物進行體積計量之手 段是從用以儲存正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之儲存槽 ,利用配管經由吸入閥將該組成物引導到分配器之氣缸 内,使分配器之活塞移動到氣缸之指定位置經由進行吸 入用來進行體積式計量。此種情況之計量體積之決定是 依照氣缸之剖面積和活塞移動量之積。在吐出依上述方 式體積計量出之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之情況時 -5 1 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------略 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)ο 1X m Zhong Zifen ao 5 The treatment surface is placed at the end to enter the temperature shot, ° c line 24 external purple, with m ο ο 2 approximately long-term light emitting effect-Q 3 F 7 The line of the radio shooter outside the European Purple West and House 10 ί dish light flashes around the xenon plate, the shape of the beam is long, the shape of the round shape of the circle | £ 3¾ is a radio shoot Π Shanghai bud ο 5 C 6 The amount is the path of the capacity of the device, the capacity of the wave and the pulse of the pulse. The road 15 It ’s a giant ^ ttr ^ itr. The display of V \ is displayed. The picture shows that the amount can be entered into the lamp. The galvanic charge is adjusted in 7 seconds. The outer axis is purple. The lamp is flashed into Xenon to shoot and shine. In this rotation, the layman advances to another 0 ° and the 10th speed. Install the second shot weight 2 according to the line as the separation distance ο 1-I disc light and chemical, outside LI Shuo Xi purple line another shape. Zi Zi ’s release sticky positron sticks to the front of the view, and there is a substrate between the end plates to the base of the disc. The light of the view of the disc is not complete. 2 After the separation, it is divided into minutes, and the row of the hardened end of the rear face is divided into one pair. After the unpaired pair, the DR in the stacking condition is at 0, and the gasification is in the bubbling condition. The hardened part of Hehua was not able to observe the physical observation of the hard observation group, and the line of hard observation of the dish was not ignored. Order --------- Line- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The sticky printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is a group of things. The outer purple shape ends the dish. The state of light is changed after the state. 137 The hard complete is not evaluated. The evaluation is also changed. The hard line is different. The condition of the Zichang-type conditioner is the same as that of the disc-shaped light. The example of the paper is more earthy than that of the disc-light. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). The disc is not used with the body of the disc. The rigid body has not been used. 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Heart) A disc obtained with the same conditions as the flat disc with a ring-shaped protrusion (Comparative Example 2). After the completion of the delay, the deformation of the rigid disc with the same conditions as those described above (Comparative Example 3). This evaluation uses the method disclosed by the present inventors in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-32G838. The results are shown in Figure 13. As can be understood from the thirteenth aspect, in Example 3 using a rigid disk, the bending angle becomes a lower value when compared with the comparative example. The difference is the bending angle in the radial direction. In the embodiment, it is 0.32 ° above, 0.29 ° below. In contrast, in Comparative Example 1, both the top and bottom of the optical disc are G. 69 °. In Comparative Example 2, the top It is 0.48 ° and the bottom is 0.46 °. In Comparative Example 3, the top is 0.65 ° and the bottom is 0.67 °. Therefore, it can be seen that it has a great effect on preventing bending in the radial direction. In addition, the tendency of the bending angle due to the overlapping position cannot be determined. In addition, when comparing Example 3 with Comparative Example 3, it can be seen that in order to prevent bending, it is necessary to perform a stretching treatment on a flat surface that is left to stand. That is, it is extremely difficult to eliminate the bends that occur at the time the extension is completed. In accordance with DVD-RAM specifications, the bending angle in the radial direction is 0.7 ° or less, and the bending angle in the circumferential direction is 0.3 ° or less. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). In addition, according to the result of Comparative Example 2, it can be confirmed that even if the discs have no bumps, when multiple stacks overlap, Since no standing flat surface is formed, the bending angle increases. Fig. 14 shows the appearance of the disc as shown by the data obtained from the evaluation of the last one. In FIG. 14, (a) is according to the present embodiment, and (b) is the external shape of the optical disc according to Comparative Example 1. In addition, both indicate -4 8-This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (ο) The evaluation results on the disc. In Figures 14 (a) and (b), the dotted line indicates the appearance of the disc without bending and is ideal, and the solid line (spiral) indicates the appearance of the evaluated disc. The disc according to this embodiment is judged It has the appearance of an approximately ideal optical disc with less bending. Fig. 15 shows a method for coating a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition by volume measurement. In Fig. 15, reference numeral 80 is a pedestal for fixing the coating device, 81 is a cylinder portion of the coating device, and 84 is a power source (motor). Numeral 90 is a pillar, which is integrated with the cylinder portion for mounting the motor. 82 is a mandrel that can move up and down, 83 is a 0 ring for sealing, which is used to prevent the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition from leaking to the top. 87 is a storage tank for storing positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition, 88 is a liquid state positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition, and 89 is a pipe for guiding the liquid positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition. To the coating device. Reference numeral 85 is a suction valve, which is opened when a positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition is sucked in, 85b indicates an open state of a valve with 85c as a starting point, and 85b indicates a closed state of a valve with 85c as a starting point. Reference numeral 86 is a discharge valve, which is opened when a positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition is discharged, 86b indicates an open state of the valve starting from 86c, and 85a indicates a closed state of the valve starting from 86c. Both the suction valve 85 and the discharge valve 86 have a structure that is constantly maintained closed by the force of a spring not shown in the figure. The positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is sucked into the cylinder 81 -49- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------ I ----- --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 11111 Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (W) 85 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The square axis B) Yu Weikai gas 2) The face valve M of the ten objects is separated from the center and the position is "0". The 85i force is applied to the 1-body group to apply and absorb the 85, and the other holding the valve M is connected to the U-shaped body and placed. dimension. The loading surface can be connected to the spring ¾). The A-position median open conductance "the suction of the cloth is not the source of W. The hard description of S Z2 is made by closing the gravitational t and the coating of it is purple. The water A1 wiring lies in the movement. The reasons for the connection of objects are shown in the following figure: Type I ^; The outer side of the coating is inserted into the holding side and the side spring leaks into Z1. In the middle of the sacrifice («Liquid 'object type should be set by the physical position of the tank should be u should be proportional to the positive amount of 72 into the physical object to make the line in the amount of liquefaction of the primary movement of D force The cloth and the group are separated from each other. The force reserve is stiff and normalized. ^ Use the action to apply the Z1 positive positive group 0-Use the movement of the purple set to make the hard vomiting drive from the unlined. Design -5 As a type of spring drive, the TTP86 trip is not completed because the bullet of the hard-coated son of 82 is set. Use the external shaft to enter, and plug the thread to make the body 84. The axis group away from Z1 uses the time type to make a purple out-of-heart mid-life pre-outline construction line to reach the heart-shaping trait. The spit is a square one and the purple one enters the horse and moves obviously. Away from the 84th position Μ, but Μ 逑 Μ 积 经 经 经 紫 紫 m m m is not due to hard The valve enters Zhengdali on the a side of the cloth on the surface of the preformed Lee 82®). The middle is the suction line. Ma Zheng 7285 square U U. The main point of the application is the axon diagram but the external spit is used for the second time. Relying on the position of 86, Zhengli, Liye 1 is used for the purpose of heart, purple, so that its moving position is closed, the existing thing is 8 and the product of the former Zhengda is (82, which is 82). Also hold the amount of the cylinder (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) A7 470952 B7 V. Description of the invention (49) In order to be liquid (liquid), the temperature characteristic of the viscosity of the liquid generally changes in an exponential function called the Arrhenius type. It also has a characteristic of a large rate of change in temperature. The valve type dispenser is used, but because it is used to control the discharge amount when the valve is opened and closed, it will be affected by the viscosity of the applied liquid, and the discharge amount will vary greatly with the ambient temperature as its disadvantage. Essentially, as the ambient temperature becomes higher, the viscosity decreases and the amount of vomiting increases. A positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition exceeding a preset amount is discharged. Conversely, when the ambient temperature becomes low, the output amount decreases, and a positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition that emits less than a predetermined amount is discharged. There is a correlation between the amount and the temperature. As a result, the amount of coating applied to the bonded body is also related to the temperature. Therefore, a situation in which a complete bonding layer cannot be formed between the two disc substrates. However, as described above, because the The volumetric type measures positive ion ultraviolet curable composition. Therefore, by adopting the method of discharging through the nozzle of the distributor, it will not cause a situation of upswing at all, and a high-throughput project can be realized. The method for measuring the volume of the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is to guide the composition into a cylinder of the dispenser through a suction valve from a storage tank for storing the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition, and distribute it. The piston of the device is moved to the designated position of the cylinder for volumetric measurement by suction. The determination of the measured volume in this case is based on the product of the cross-sectional area of the cylinder and the amount of piston movement. When the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition measured in volume according to the above method is ejected-5 1-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------- ----- Slightly (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page)

訂---------線I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(W ) ,使吸入閥閉合,和使設在噴嘴側之吐出閥開放,在吸 入到转塞之情況時,可以依相反之方向移動藉以實現。 在以上之方法中,每一次塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物時就重複進行吸入,吐出之動作。 和/或在預先知道直徑之大氣缸内吸入正離子型紫外 線硬化性組成物時,只需要使活塞每次移動所需要之份 量和吐出就可以進行體積計量之塗布。這種情況之正離 子型紫外線硬化性組成物之計量體積之決定是依照氣缸 之剖面積和1次吐出之活塞移動距離之積β在以上之方 法中,對於吸入正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之1次作 業,可以進行多次之吐出,在氣缸内之正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物成為變空之時刻,再度的重複進行吸入之 動作。依此方式吐出之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物, 經由紫外線照射可以塗布在該2個光碟基板之至少之一 方。 另外,在環狀塗布中,為著提高光碟之圓周方向之塗 布精確度,在吐出預先體積計量之正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物(接箸劑)之指定量時,假如使用電式動力,例 如使用AC伺服馬達作為驅動用動力源時,當與以壓縮空 氣作為驅動用動力源者比較,不僅可以進行更高精確度 之塗布,而且可以很容易調節塗布之速度和塗布量。 另外,在預先進行正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之體 積計量之情況時,亦可以依照正離子型紫外線硬化性組 成物之比重,硬化收縮率,接合面積,和接著層之厚度 -52- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Order --------- Line I Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (W), close the suction valve, and make The discharge valve provided on the nozzle side is opened, and when it is sucked into the plug, it can be moved in the opposite direction. In the above method, each time the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is applied, the operation of inhaling and discharging is repeated. When the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is inhaled in a large cylinder with a known diameter in advance, the volume measurement coating can be performed only by moving the amount and discharge required for each movement of the piston. In this case, the measurement volume of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is determined according to the product β of the cross-sectional area of the cylinder and the piston movement distance of a single ejection. In the above method, for inhaling the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition One operation can be carried out multiple times, and when the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition in the cylinder becomes empty, the suction operation is repeated again. The positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition discharged in this way can be applied to at least one of the two optical disc substrates by ultraviolet irradiation. In addition, in the ring coating, in order to improve the coating accuracy in the circumferential direction of the optical disc, if a predetermined amount of a positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition (adhesive) is measured in advance, if electric power is used, For example, when an AC servo motor is used as the driving power source, when compared with a person using compressed air as the driving power source, not only the coating with higher accuracy can be performed, but also the speed and amount of coating can be easily adjusted. In addition, when the volume measurement of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is performed in advance, the specific gravity of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition, the curing shrinkage rate, the bonding area, and the thickness of the adhesive layer may be -52- Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

A7 470952 B7__ 五、發明說明(Η ) 用來實施計量。 〈實施例4 &gt; 下面將說明用以確認使用上逑構造之效果所進行之實 驗。 所使用之光碟基板是在外徑12Q®m,内徑15ιπιη之聚磺 酯製基板之表面形成有厚度SGiini之Α1膜之DVD用之光碟 基板,和具有半透明之Au膜(68 Gnm之透過率為70%之光 碟基板,貼合後可以很容易評估接著層厚。剛體碟使用 以旋轉加工成厚度外徑lOOmni,内徑15.2mni之純A1 製中空碟。 另外,正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物使用以加氫雙酚 A二縮小甘油醚6 0份,1,6 -己烷二醇二縮水甘油醚 (阪本藥品公司製之「16H- DGE」低氯品,全氯量= 0.2 重量%,40份,光正離子聚合開始劑「RH0D0RSIL PHOTOINITIATOR2074」(路特亞公司製之4- 甲苯- 4- (1 -甲基乙基)苯碘_四(五氟苯)硼酸鹽)〇· 5份,矽油L 「7 6 0 4」(曰本有尼卡公司製)0 . 2份,以6 0°C進行1小 時之混合溶解所形成者,其粘度為2 2 6 m P a s ( 2 5 °C )。另 外,該加氫雙酚A二縮小甘油醚之獲得是使雙酚A二 縮小甘油醚(大日本油墨化學工業公司製之「葉匹克龍 850S」全氯量=0.1 4重量% )在存在有釕觸媒之條件下, 以氫壓4 G k g / c m 2,溫度4 0 °C進行7小時之加氫。 使用具有以習知方法製作之體積計量功能之塗布裝置 ,以塗布量為D.4g之方式使該正離子型紫外線硬化性組 -53- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------ΦΜ.--------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明) 成物落下和塗布在該光碟基板上成為璟狀。因為該塗布 裝置之氣缸81之内徑為8 mm,和該正離子型紫外線硬化 性組成物之比重為1.065 ,所以使用以産生該塗布量之 水源差(Zl- Z2)成為0.48cm之方式,利用圖中未顯示之 控制裝置使馬達8 4進行動作。 紫外線照射裝置4 2使用優盛公司製之紫外線照射裝置 I 2 5 0型,D燈(發光長度大約2 5 c m ),以最大輸出之7 0 % 之輸出進行照射。 塗布後,使未塗布有正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之 光碟基板進行重畳,將該光碟基板如第9圔所示的裝載 在剛體碟8上。利用位於上側之光碟基板之本身重量使 該2片光碟基板間之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物開始 展延。在其上裝載剛體碟8 ,然後將所獲得之碟裝載在 剛體碟8上。以下重複同樣之作業,重疊60片之光碟和 剛體碟。 在重曼第60片之碟後,在24 °C之溫度下放置5分鐘, 然後利用鹵素加熱器進行端面處理。該鹵素加熱器使用 具有高效率反射性能之設有冷鏡之鹵素加熱器單位(屋 西歐電機公司製之IHU-H0卜00型)。加熱條件是以 AC10QV之電壓點亮鹵素加熱器單位,使其與光碟10之距 離成為5 Q G m m ,在加熱器點亮中使心軸7 1以2圈/秒之 速度進行旋轉。 為著評估接著層之平均膜厚等隨環境溫度之變化方式 ,所以分別在環境溫度2 4 °C和2 7 °C亦實施同樣之貼合實 -5 4 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·· 470952 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(P ) 驗,用來確認兩者之差異。 在端面處理之後,以各種環境溫度製作之光渫,使光 碟基板間之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物膠化,未觀察 到有端面之粘粘的。另外,在3分鐘之後,將該2片之 光碟基板剝離,觀察該正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物之 硬化,接著狀況時,全體成為一樣之硬化,大致沒有未 硬化部份,亦未觀察到有氣泡。另外,對於未進行端面 處理之光碟,亦觀察其硬化狀況,即使在重疊後經過10 分鐘,亦會有光碟端面之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 之粘粘之狀態。 在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物完全硬化之後,評估 光碟之彎曲和接著層之平均膜厚。另外,在評估平均膜 厚之情況時,使用與上逑者同樣之方法,用來貼合形成 有A 1膜之光碟基板和形成有A II之半透明膜之光碟基板。 彎曲評估使用本發明人等在日本國專利案特開平 10-320838號所掲示之方法,在接著層厚之評估時,使 用3次元中間層膜厚撿査条統T M S - 9 0 1型(大日本油墨 化學工業公司製)。其結果如第16圖所示。 但是不能確認由於積層位置而産生之反射角之傾向。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 依照DVD- RAM之規格之要求時,半徑方向之彎曲角為 0.7°以下,圓周方向之彎曲角為0.3°以下,但是依照 本實施例時,大致沒有不良品之可能性。 另外,即使環境溫度有變化時,由於正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物之硬化所形成之接著層之平均膜厚大致沒 -55-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(Η ) 有變化。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 其次,作為比較例者是在正離子型紫外線硬化性組成 物之塗布時,使用未具有體積計量功能之閥式之塗布裝 置,評估其所貼合之光碟。塗布裝置使用美國EFD公司 之型號1 5 Ο Ο V (噴嘴内徑D . 8 3 m m ),除了塗布裝置外,使 用與上逑同樣之條件進行阽合,撿查依照環境溫度之變 化(比較例1 )。調節塗布量之設定,使其在24 °C之環境 溫度時成為〇.4g,其以後不需調節的進行阽合。 第17圖表示其評估結果。如第17圖所示,在比較例中 由於彎曲而造成不良品之可能性大致没有。另外一方面 ,接著層之平均膜厚在環境溫度2 4 °C進行貼合之情況時 為3 5 . 1 a in ,與此相對的,在環境溫度2 7 °C進行貼合之 情況時增加為4 5 . 5 a in ,可以得知環境溫度變化之影響 非常大。 依照這種方式,當塗布正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 時,因為預先體積式計量所欲塗布之量,所以卽使璟境 溫度變化時塗布量亦不致没有變化,可以實現接著層之 平均厚度成為一定之高産量之貼合工程。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 另外,在上述之實施例形態中,在不偏離本發明之主 旨範圍内,亦可採用其他之構造。 例如可以採用第1 8圖所示之彈性施加裝置(最表層光 碟基板保持裝置)22'或第19画所示之彈性施加裝置(最 表層光碟基板保持裝置)22”,用來代替第2圖所示之搬 運裝置2之彈性施加裝置22。 -56-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 470952 B7_ 五、發明說明(β) 第18圔所示之搬蓮裝置2之彈性施加裝置22'具備有 一對之真空吸著部221和往復動作部222。該2個之往復 動作部222均可以獨立的動作。 在此種構造中,要移載第1光碟基板la時,將搬蓮裝 置2配置成面對第1光碟基板la中之最表層之一片la’, 如(a)所示,使其真空吸著部221之雙方接觸在第1光碟 基板1 a '。 其次,使真空吸著部222真空吸著在第1光碟基板la' 之板面,然後,如(b)所示的使往復動作部222中之一方 退縮。在這種情況,退縮之往復動作部222將第1光碟 基板la’中之被設在前端之真空吸著部221吸著之部份, 提上到上方。 這時,在第1光碟基板la1中,未退縮之一方之往復 動作部222和被設在其前端之真空吸著部221之作用是用 來機械式的限制第1光碟基板1^ ,藉以抑制其變位。 因此,由具有可撓性之材料所形成之第1光碟基板la', 如(b)所示的變形成為彎曲狀態,因此在第1光碟基板 la ^産生畸變。 因此,第1光碟基板la’和擬似附著之第1光碟基板 la ”,均受到沿箸最表層之第1光碟基板la’變形之力量 之作用,産生畸變,同時受到用以消除畸變之復元力之 作用。 然後,當該復元力大於與最表層之第1光碟基板la' 之間之附著力時,下側之第1光碟基板1 a |’ ,就從第1 -5 7 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)A7 470952 B7__ 5. The description of the invention (Η) is used to implement the measurement. <Embodiment 4 &gt; An experiment performed to confirm the effect of using the upper structure will be described below. The disc substrate used is a disc substrate for a DVD having a thickness of SGiini A1 film on the surface of a polysulfonate substrate having an outer diameter of 12Qm and an inner diameter of 15m, and a translucent Au film (transmittance of 68 Gnm) It is a 70% optical disk substrate, which can be easily evaluated after bonding. Rigid body disks are made of pure A1 hollow disks with a thickness of 100 mm outside diameter and 15.2 mm inside diameter. The positive ion type UV-curable composition 60 parts of hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether ("16H-DGE" low-chlorine product manufactured by Sakamoto Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., total chlorine content = 0.2% by weight 40 parts, photo-cationic polymerization initiator "RH0D0RSIL PHOTOINITIATOR2074" (4-toluene-4- (1-methylethyl) phenyliodide_tetrakis (pentafluorobenzene) borate, manufactured by Routia Corporation) 0.5 parts , Silicon oil L "7 6 0 4" (manufactured by Nika Co., Ltd.) 0.2 parts, formed by mixing and dissolving at 60 ° C for 1 hour, the viscosity is 2 2 6 m P as (2 5 ° C). In addition, the hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether is obtained by "Chlorophyll 850S" manufactured by Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. has a total chlorine content of 0.1 4% by weight.) In the presence of a ruthenium catalyst, it is subjected to a hydrogen pressure of 4 G kg / cm 2 and a temperature of 40 ° C for 7 hours. Hydrogenation: Use a coating device with a volume measurement function made by a conventional method to make the positive ion ultraviolet curable group with a coating amount of D.4g -53- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ΦΜ .-------- Order --------- line · (Please read the precautions on the back first Refill this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention The inner diameter of the cylinder 81 of the device is 8 mm, and the specific gravity of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is 1.065. Therefore, the water source difference (Zl-Z2) for generating the coating amount is 0.48 cm. A control device, not shown, operates the motor 8 4. The ultraviolet irradiation device 4 2 uses Yosen Corporation The UV irradiation device I 250 manufactured by the company, D lamp (emission length of about 25 cm), was irradiated at 70% of the maximum output. After coating, the positive UV curing composition was not coated. The optical disc substrate is re-rolled, and the optical disc substrate is mounted on a rigid disc 8 as shown in Fig. 9. Using the weight of the upper optical disc substrate, the positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition between the two optical disc substrates begins to develop. Delay. A rigid body disc 8 is loaded thereon, and the obtained disc is loaded on the rigid body disc 8. Repeat the same operation below, overlapping 60 discs and rigid discs. After the 60th disc of Heavy Man, it was left at a temperature of 24 ° C for 5 minutes, and then the end surface treatment was performed using a halogen heater. This halogen heater uses a halogen mirror unit with a cold mirror (IHU-H0 Bu 00 type manufactured by Western Europe Electric Co., Ltd.) with high efficiency reflection performance. The heating condition is to illuminate the halogen heater unit with a voltage of AC10QV so that the distance from the disc 10 becomes 5 Q G m m, and the mandrel 71 is rotated at a speed of 2 revolutions per second while the heater is on. In order to evaluate how the average film thickness of the adhesive layer changes with ambient temperature, the same fit is also applied at ambient temperatures of 2 4 ° C and 2 7 ° C, respectively. 5 4-This paper standard applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Order 470952 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (P), used to confirm the difference between the two. After the end surface treatment, the photocathode produced at various ambient temperatures gelled the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition between the disc substrates, and no stickiness on the end surface was observed. In addition, after 3 minutes, the two optical disc substrates were peeled off, and the hardening of the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition was observed. In the subsequent state, the entire hardening was the same, and there was almost no unhardened portion, and no observation There are bubbles. In addition, the hardened state of the disc without end surface treatment was also observed. Even if 10 minutes elapsed after the overlap, the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition on the end surface of the disc was sticky. After the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition was completely cured, the bending of the optical disc and the average film thickness of the adhesive layer were evaluated. In addition, when evaluating the average film thickness, the same method as that used for the above was used to attach the disc substrate on which the A 1 film was formed and the disc substrate on which the translucent film A A was formed. The bending evaluation uses the method shown by the present inventors in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-320838. When the layer thickness is evaluated, the 3-dimensional intermediate layer film thickness inspection system TMS-9101 (large (Manufactured by Japan Ink Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). The results are shown in Figure 16. However, the tendency of the reflection angle due to the laminated position cannot be confirmed. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). According to the requirements of DVD-RAM specifications, the bending angle in the radial direction is 0.7 ° or less, and the bending angle in the circumferential direction is 0.3. ° or less, but in accordance with this embodiment, there is almost no possibility of defective products. In addition, even when the ambient temperature changes, the average film thickness of the adhesive layer formed by the hardening of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition is generally less than -55.-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). (Mm) 470952 A7 B7 5. The description of the invention (Η) has changed. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page.) Second, as a comparative example, use a valve-type coating device that does not have a volume measurement function when coating positive ion ultraviolet curable composition. Hezhi CD. The coating device used a model of the United States EFD Co., Ltd. 1 5 〇 Ο V (nozzle inner diameter D. 83 mm), except for the coating device, it was combined under the same conditions as above, and the inspection was carried out according to the change of ambient temperature (comparative example) 1 ). Adjust the setting of the coating amount so that it will be 0.4 g at an ambient temperature of 24 ° C, and then mix it without adjustment. Figure 17 shows the results of the evaluation. As shown in Fig. 17, there is almost no possibility of defective products due to bending in the comparative example. On the other hand, the average film thickness of the adhesive layer is 35.1 a in when the ambient temperature is 2 4 ° C, while it is increased when the ambient temperature is 2 7 ° C. It is 4 5. 5 a in, it can be known that the influence of environmental temperature changes is very large. According to this method, when the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition is applied, the volume to be applied is measured in advance in a volumetric manner, so that the coating amount does not change when the ambient temperature is changed, and the average thickness of the adhesive layer can be achieved Become a certain high-volume fitting project. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, other structures may be adopted without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, the elastic application device (top surface disc substrate holding device) 22 ′ shown in FIG. 18 or the elastic application device (top surface disc substrate holding device) 22 ”shown in FIG. 19 may be used instead of FIG. 2 The elastic application device 22 of the conveying device 2 shown. -56- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 470952 B7_ V. Description of the invention (β) The elastic application device 22 'of the lotus device 2 is provided with a pair of the vacuum suction portion 221 and the reciprocating operation portion 222. Each of the two reciprocating operation portions 222 can operate independently. In this structure, the first In the case of the optical disc substrate la, the lotus device 2 is arranged so as to face one of the outermost layers la 'in the first optical disc substrate la, and as shown in (a), both sides of the vacuum suction portion 221 are brought into contact with the first optical disc substrate. 1 a '. Next, the vacuum suction portion 222 is vacuum-sucked onto the plate surface of the first optical disc substrate la', and then one of the reciprocating operation portions 222 is retracted as shown in (b). In this case, The retracted reciprocating operation unit 222 sets the first of the first optical disk substrate la 'to the front. The portion sucked by the vacuum suction portion 221 is lifted up. At this time, in the first optical disc substrate la1, the reciprocating action portion 222 of the unretracted one and the vacuum suction portion 221 provided at the front end function. It is used to mechanically restrict the first optical disc substrate 1 ^ so as to suppress its displacement. Therefore, the first optical disc substrate la 'formed of a flexible material is deformed into a bent state as shown in (b). Therefore, distortion occurs in the first optical disc substrate la ^. Therefore, the first optical disc substrate la ′ and the first optical disc substrate la ″ that seem to be attached are both affected by the deformation force of the first optical disc substrate la ′ along the outermost surface of the disc. Distortion is generated and at the same time it is affected by the restoration force used to eliminate the distortion. Then, when the restoring force is greater than the adhesion force to the top surface of the first optical disc substrate la ', the lower first optical disc substrate 1 a |' will be from 1-5 7-This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

訂---------線I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(A ) 光碟基板la’偏移,復元成為原來之平板狀。利用這種 方式,最表層之第1光碟基板la’中之被退縮之真空吸 著部2 2 1吸著之部份,離開下側之第1光碟基板1 a ”。 通常,靜電力或利用動力之吸引之真空吸著力,所具 有之性質是一旦産生有稍微之空隙時,其力量就急激的 變弱。因此,如(b )所示,在第1光碟基板1 a '之一部份 離開下側之第1光碟基板1 a ”之情況時,可以離開部份 之附著力大幅的減小。 其次,如(c)所示,使目前已退縮之一方之往復動作 部2 2 2回到原來之位置,和使另外一方之往復動作部2 2 2 退縮。依照這種方式,利用與上述同樣之作用,使新退 縮之真空吸著部2 2 1所吸著之部份,離開下側之第1光 碟基板1 a &quot;,和可以使離開之部份之附著力大幅的減小。 利用此種可獨立伸縮之二個往復動作部222之交替退 縮,在第1光碟基板laf當産生2次之彈性變形時,即 使在擬似附著力相對變強之情況時,附著力可以在第1 光碟基板la'之全體區域確實的減小,利用這種方式可 以確實的防止一次取出2片之第1光碟基板la。 另外,如第19圖所示之彈性施加裝置221 ,亦可以在 3個位置具備有可獨立動作之往復動作部222和真空吸 著部2 2 1 。 在此種構造中,如(a)所示,使真空吸著部221分別吸 著在第1光碟基板1 a ”之後,如(b )所示,使位於中央位 置之真空吸著部221變位到上方,然後如(c)所示,在使 -58- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -^^1 ^^1 ^^1 ^^1 ^^1 ^^1 ^^1 ^ ^ ^^1 .^1 n flu fft I _ -V5 矣 ^ 470952 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(η ) 中央之真空吸箸部221回到原來之位置之後,使兩端之 真空吸著部221變位到上方。用來使對最表層之第1光 碟基板la'施加作用之附著力在光碟基板之全面確實的 減小,可以用來只將第1光碟基板1 ^引離。 依照這種方式,經由將往復動作部2 2 2和真空吸著部 221設在3値位置,可以使施加在第1光碟基板la'之畸 變成為更大,藉以提高離開力。 另外,在第18圖,第13圖所示之光碟基板之引離方法 中,經由調節真空吸箸部2 2 1之間之間隔或往復動作部 222之可動範圍,可以用來調整離開力。但是,該等調 節只能在光碟基板之彈性變形範圍内。另外,第1 8圖, 第19圖所示之第1光碟基板la亦可以是第2光碟基板lb。 另外,在第2圖或第18圖,第19圖所示之光碟基板之 引離方法中是採用真空吸著作為負載施加手段用來使第 1光碟基板la'産生彈性變形。在這種情況,假如真空 吸著部221是以橡謬製成時,可以防止使光碟基板表面 受傷。另外,對第1光碟基板la’之負載施加手段並不 只限於真空吸著,亦可以使用其他之手段。 [第2實施形態] 下面i參照附圖用來說明本發明之第2實施形態之 D V D之製造例。 另外,該第2實施形態中所說明之DVD之製造裝置, 因為其主要部份與第1實施形態所示之DVD之製造裝置 具有相同之構造,在此處只說明與第1實施形態不同之 -59- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----I---------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(w) 部份,和對於與第1實施形態共同之構造附加相同之符 號,而其說明則加以省略。 第20圖所示之DVD之製造裝置其與第1實施形態之不 同部份是光碟積層/分離裝置D 1之構造部份。 在該光碟積層/分離裝置ΙΓ中,除了用以將光碟保持 器7從第1位置11搬運到第2位置17之輸送帶14外,更 設有用以將光碟保持器7從第3位置1 8搬蓮到第4位置 13之輸送帶141。另外,第21圖所示,在位於第1 ,第2 ,第3 ,第4位置11, 17, 18,13所形成之平面P1之下 方之平面P2,設有輸送帶14之位於輸送帶14之下方,以 與輸送帶14相反之方向搬蓮光碟保持器7 ,和在輸送帶 141之下方設有輸送帶143以與輸送帶141相反之方向搬 蓮光碟保持器7 。 另外,在第2位置17和輸送帶142之起點142a之間設 有圖中未顯示之升降裝置,用來使光碟保持器7從第2 位置17朝向輸送帶142之起點142a之間下降。另外,在 輸送帶142之終點142b和第1位置11之間亦設有圖中未 顯示之升降裝置,用來使光碟保持器可以從輸送帶142 之終點142b朝向第1位置11上升。利用這種方式,在與 平面P1正交之平面形成光碟保持器7之搬蓮路徑CP1從 第1位置11經由第2位置17,輸送帶之起點142a和終點 1 4 2 b再回到第1位置1 1。 同樣的,在第4位置13和輸送帶143之起點143 a之間 設有圖中未顯示之升降裝置,用來使光碟保持器7從第 -60- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Order --------- Line I Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs It becomes the original flat shape. In this way, the retracted vacuum suction portion 2 2 1 in the first surface of the first optical disk substrate la ′ is separated from the lower first optical disk substrate 1 a ”. Generally, electrostatic force or use The vacuum suction force of the attraction of power has a property that once a slight gap is generated, its power is rapidly weakened. Therefore, as shown in (b), it is a part of the first optical disc substrate 1 a ' When the first optical disc substrate 1 a ”is separated from the lower side, the adhesion of the separated portion can be greatly reduced. Next, as shown in (c), the one-way reciprocating part 2 2 2 is retracted to the original position, and the other one-way reciprocating part 2 2 2 is retracted. In this way, by using the same effect as described above, the part sucked by the newly retracted vacuum suction part 2 2 1 is separated from the first optical disk substrate 1 a &quot; and the part that can be separated is removed. The adhesion is greatly reduced. By using the alternate retraction of the two reciprocating action portions 222 that can independently expand and contract, when the elastic deformation of the first optical disk substrate laf occurs twice, even when the pseudo-adhesion is relatively strong, the adhesion can be at the first The entire area of the optical disc substrate la 'is surely reduced. In this way, it is possible to reliably prevent two first optical disc substrates la from being taken out at a time. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19, the elastic application device 221 may be provided with a reciprocating portion 222 and a vacuum suction portion 2 2 1 which can independently operate at three positions. In such a structure, as shown in (a), the vacuum suction sections 221 are respectively sucked on the first optical disc substrate 1 a ”, and as shown in (b), the vacuum suction sections 221 located in the center position are changed. Position it to the top, and then as shown in (c), make the paper size of -58- apply to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^ ^ ^ 1. ^ 1 n flu fft I _ -V5 矣 ^ 470952 A7 B7 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Cooperative System 5. Description of the invention (η) After the vacuum suction portion 221 at the center returns to the original position, the vacuum suction portion 221 at both ends is displaced to the top. It is used to apply the first surface of the optical disc substrate la ' The effective adhesion force is reduced in a comprehensive and reliable manner on the optical disc substrate, and can be used to guide only the first optical disc substrate 1 ^. In this way, by setting the reciprocating action portion 2 2 2 and the vacuum suction portion 221 at 3 The 値 position can increase the distortion applied to the first optical disc substrate la ', thereby increasing the separation force. In addition, the optical disc substrates shown in Figs. 18 and 13 In the detaching method, the separation force can be adjusted by adjusting the interval between the vacuum suction portion 2 2 1 or the movable range of the reciprocating action portion 222. However, these adjustments can only be within the elastic deformation range of the disc substrate. In addition, the first optical disk substrate 1a shown in Figs. 18 and 19 may be the second optical disk substrate 1b. In addition, the method for removing the optical disk substrate shown in Figs. 2 or 18, 19 In this case, a vacuum suction is used as a load application means to elastically deform the first optical disk substrate la '. In this case, if the vacuum suction portion 221 is made of rubber, the surface of the optical disk substrate can be prevented from being injured. In addition, the means for applying a load to the first optical disc substrate 1a 'is not limited to vacuum suction, and other means may be used. [Second Embodiment] The following describes the DVD of the second embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings. In addition, the manufacturing apparatus of the DVD described in the second embodiment has the same structure as the manufacturing apparatus of the DVD shown in the first embodiment, so only the same configuration as the first Implementation form The difference is -59- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- I --------------- Order ---- ----- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Part (w) of the Invention Description The structure is given the same symbol, and its description is omitted. The DVD manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 20 is different from the first embodiment in the structure of the optical disc stacking / separating apparatus D1. In this optical disc stacking / separating device IΓ, in addition to the conveyor belt 14 for carrying the optical disc holder 7 from the first position 11 to the second position 17, it is further provided with the optical disc holder 7 from the third position 1 8 Move the lotus to the conveyor belt 141 at the fourth position 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, on a plane P2 located below the plane P1 formed by the first, second, third, and fourth positions 11, 17, 18, and 13, the conveyor belt 14 is provided on the conveyor belt 14. Below, the lotus disc holder 7 is moved in a direction opposite to the conveyor belt 14, and the conveyor belt 143 is provided below the conveyor belt 141 to move the lotus disc holder 7 in a direction opposite to the conveyor belt 141. A lifting device (not shown) is provided between the second position 17 and the starting point 142a of the conveyor belt 142 to lower the disc holder 7 from the second position 17 toward the starting point 142a of the conveyor belt 142. In addition, a lifting device (not shown) is provided between the end point 142b of the conveyor belt 142 and the first position 11 to enable the disc holder to rise from the end point 142b of the conveyor belt 142 toward the first position 11. In this way, the moving path CP1 of the optical disc holder 7 is formed on the plane orthogonal to the plane P1 from the first position 11 to the second position 17, and the start point 142a and end point 1 4 2 b of the conveyor belt return to the first position. Position 1 1. Similarly, a lifting device (not shown) is provided between the fourth position 13 and the starting point 143 a of the conveyer belt 143 to make the disc holder 7 from the -60th to the Chinese standard (CNS). A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β ) 輸顯 在未 , 中 外圖 另有 〇 設 降亦 下間 3a之 4 8 1 1 點置 起位 之 CO 3 第 4 α 1 ί 帶3b 送14 輸Is Ετπ 向終 朝之 3 1 3 置14 位帶 4 送 3 與 *4 1 在 帶 , 送式 輸方 A1 j-&quot;13= 從種 以這 可用 7 利 器 0 持升 保上 碟18 光置 使位 來 3 用第 ,向 置朝 裝3b 4* 降 1 升點 之終 示之 器 6 1 點二肖 碟3.回 光14再 成帶18 形送置 面輸位 平由 3 之經第 交13和 正置 , iM IAV P 位 3 面 414 平第點 徑 路 蓮 搬 之 帶 送 輸 從終 2 之 置 體 剛 成 形 式 方 述 下 以 D 置 Ο 裝璟 離循 分之 / 7 層器 積持 碟保 光碟 該光 用和 利 8 碟 配式 被方 在此 疊以 重使 1 , CP替次 徑交其 路 0〇 Ο 蓮碟上 搬體 7 1 剛器 第和持 示10保 表碟碟 式光光 方之之 式運11 模搬置 以 CO 位 圖置 1 22裝第 第蓮在 搬置 軸 同 用 利 該碟之 在光10 ,有碟 15載光 置裝行 位使進 5 後來 第然用 到,16 動理置 移處位 7 延 6 器展第 持之到 保 1 動 碟碟移 光光 7 之行器 10進持 碟15保 光置碟 有位光 層 δ 之 積第10 , 碟 17體 置 剛 位 將 2 和 第 , 到R3 蓮 域 搬 區 7 。査 器離檢 持分碟 保 〇〇 光 碟碟到 光體載 將剛移 ,和10 後10碟 然碟光 。光之 理使後 處處離 溫該分 加在 I----- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂---------养 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 器 持 保 碟 光 之 3 11 置 位 4 第 在 置 配 被 到 載 移 的 逑 所 後 。 如上 區成 査就 撿 7 碟器 光持 到保 載碟 移光 8 之 碟17 體置 剛位 和 2 10第 碟 , 光時 之13 有置 所位 將 4 成第 完和 &gt; 3 當 R 域 態 狀 空 變14 為帶 點 起 之 時 這 送 7 輸器 到持 降保 下碟 7 光 器將 持42 保I 碟 光 之 空 變 使 帶 送 輸 用 利 後 然 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(k) 搬運到終點1 4 2 b。 被搬運到輸送帶142之終點142 b之變空之光碟保持器7 從終點142b上升,被搬運到第1位置11。然後,該光碟 保持器7用來積層剛體碟8和光碟10,再度的朝向第2 位置17搬蓮。 另外一方面,第23圖以模式方式表示第2搬運路徑 CP2。其中,如上所述,在第2位置17被分離之剛體碟8 移載到位於第3位置1 8之光碟保持器7上。然後,在光 碟保持器7上裝載有指定量之剛體碟8後,該光碟保持 器7以裝載有剛體碟8之狀態被輸送帶141搬運到第4 位置1 3。到達第4位置1 3之剛體碟8用來進行第1位置 1 1之光碟1 0和剛體碟8之重疊。 經由將剛體碟8移載到第1位置,用來使位於第4位 置13之光碟保持器7成為變空狀態,這時變空狀態之光 碟保持器7進行下降,被搬運到輸送帶143之起點143a。 然後,該光碟保持器7被輸送帶143搬蓮到終點143b 。在輸送帶143之終點143b,多個變空之光碟保持器7 成為等待狀態,在第3位置18之完成剛體碟8之積層之 光碟保持器7被搬蓮到第4位置後,從輸送帶143之終 點143b側朝向第3位置18供給光碟保持器7 。 供給到第3位置18之變空之光碟保持器7積層有在第 2位置17分離之剛體碟8 ,完成積層指定量之剛體碟8 之光碟保持器7被搬蓮到第4位置13。 依照上述之DVD製造裝置時,在光碟積層/分離裝置 -6 2 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) The output is not shown, the Chinese and foreign pictures are different. Set the lower and lower 3a of the 4 8 1 1 point of the CO 3 4 4 1 1 ί 3b to send 14 to lose Is Ετπ To the end, 3 1 3 set the 14-bit band 4 to send 3 and * 4 1 in the band, the send-out side A1 j- &quot; 13 = From this kind of use 7 can be used 7 sharp tools 0 hold up the disc 18 light set Come to the 3rd place, install the 3d 4 * 4 liters of the final display of the rising point 6 1 point two Xiao discs 3. Return to the light 14 and re-form into a 18-shaped delivery surface. With the upright position, iM IAV P position 3 side 414 flat point path, the belt is transported from the end of the 2nd position. Just put it in the form described below. D position 0. Install the / 7-layer device holding disc. The optical disk and the optical 8-disc quilt are stacked here to replay 1, and the CP alternates its path. 00 〇 The lotus disc is moved 7 1 The rigid device is held and the 10-protected disc In the light and light mode, the 11 molds are moved with the CO bitmap. 1 22 is installed with the first lotus in the relocation shaft. The disk is used in the light 10, and the disk 15 is loaded with light. Of course, the 16th movement is moved to the 7th place, the 6th to the 6th exhibition, the 1st to the 1st mover, the 7th to the 10th to the 10th, the 10th to the 10th to the 15th, and the 10th to the 10th The dish 17 will be placed rigidly and will be 2nd and 2nd, to R3 lotus field moving area 7. The checker is separated from the inspection, and the holding of the disc is guaranteed. The disc will be moved to the light body, and the disc will be discontinued after 10 discs. The reason for the light is to add the points from the back to the I ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order --------- Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The printer holds 3 of the disc 3 and sets the 4th position. If the above area is checked, pick up 7 discs, hold the discs, hold the discs, and move the discs. The 8th position is the rigid position and the 2nd 10th position. The 13th time when the position is set, the 4th position will be completed. &Gt; 3 When R The domain state air change 14 is the time when the tape starts. This will send 7 losers to the lower disc. The optical device will hold 42 guarantees. The air change of the disc light will make the belt transfer profitable. Then this paper applies to China. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (k) Transfer to the end point 1 4 2 b. The empty disc holder 7 carried to the end point 142 b of the conveyor belt 142 rises from the end point 142 b and is carried to the first position 11. Then, the optical disc holder 7 is used to laminate the rigid disc 8 and the optical disc 10, and move the lotus toward the second position 17 again. On the other hand, Fig. 23 schematically shows the second conveyance path CP2. However, as described above, the rigid body disc 8 separated at the second position 17 is transferred to the optical disc holder 7 located at the third position 18. Then, after a predetermined amount of the rigid body disc 8 is loaded on the disc holder 7, the disc holder 7 is transported to the fourth position 13 by the conveyor belt 141 while the rigid disc 8 is loaded. The rigid body disc 8 that has reached the fourth position 13 is used to overlap the rigid disc 8 and the rigid disc 8 in the first position 11. By transferring the rigid disc 8 to the first position, the disc holder 7 located at the fourth position 13 becomes empty. At this time, the disc holder 7 in the empty state is lowered and is transported to the starting point of the conveyor 143. 143a. Then, the disc holder 7 is moved to the end point 143b by the conveyor belt 143. At the end point 143b of the conveyor belt 143, a plurality of empty disc holders 7 are in a waiting state. At the third position 18, the laminated disc holders 7 of the laminated rigid disc 8 are moved to the fourth position. The end point 143b of 143 is supplied to the disc holder 7 toward the third position 18. The empty disc holder 7 supplied to the third position 18 is laminated with the rigid body disc 8 separated at the second position 17, and the disc holder 7 having completed the lamination of the specified amount of the rigid body 8 is moved to the fourth position 13. When the DVD manufacturing device is manufactured according to the above, the disc stacking / separating device is used. -6 2-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

470952 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(w) D、於第1 ,第2 ,第3 ,第4位置1 1, 1 7 , 18, 1 3, 剛體碟被循璟利用,另外,在第1和第2搬運路徑C P 1, C P 2,光碟保持器7被循璟利用。利用這種方式可以進 行剛體碟8和光碟保持器7之循環利用,藉以實現有效 之製造工程。 在這種情況,因為第1和第2搬運路徑CP1,CP2形成 與平面P1正交,所以光碟保持器7之循環利用時,不需 要很多之平面空間,在有限之空間内可有效的進行光碟 保持器7之循璟利用。 [第3實施形態] ' 下照附圖用來說明本發明之第3實施形態之 D V D之製造例。 其中,與第1和第2實施形態共同之構造附加相同之 符號,而其說明則加以省略。 第24圖所示之DVD製造裝置之概略構造是由光碟基板 取出區域R1,光碟製作區域R2,和光碟積層區域R4構成。 光碟基板取出區域之構成包含有:儲存區域A1,在 第1光碟基板la和第2光碟基板lb成為積層之狀態,利 用光碟保持器7加以保持;和取出區域A 2,對於被光碟 保持器7保持之第1和第2光碟基板la, lb,各取出一 Η。 另外,光碟製成區域R 2之構成具備有:落下照射裝置 4 ,用來使正離子型紫外線硬化樹脂落下到第1光碟基 板la;重昼裝置5 ,用來使第1光碟基板la之落下有正 -63- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----—---------------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_ 五、發明說明(^ ) 離子型紫外線硬化樹脂之面成為面對第2光碟基板1 b, 藉以使該等第1和第2光碟基板la, lb重疊,璁連裝置 19,用來搬運在重疊裝置5形成之光碟1Q;光碟積層/ 分離裝置D”,用來進行光碟i 0之展延和端面硬化處理; 和移載裝置2G,用來裝光碟10從光碟積層/分離裝置D' 移載到光碟撿査區域R 3。 5外,光碟檢査區域R3由光碟撿查裝置31構成,用來 檢査所形成之光碟10之良或不良,光碟積層區域R4由光 碟選別/積層裝置32構成,用來不良品之光碟10排出, 和將被判定為不是不良品之光碟1G積層在光碟保持器7 上。 該等光碟基板取出區域R1,光碟製成區域R2,光碟撿 査區域K 3,和光碟積層區域R 4依照順序被配置成從平面 看時成為近似ϋ字狀,在該U字之起點和終點分別配置 光碟基板取出區域R1和光碟積層區域R4。另外,在光碟 基板取出區域R1和光碟積層區域R4之間形成搬運路徑33 用來搬蓮變空之光碟保持器7 。 下面將概略的說明本實施形態之DVD製造工程。 在光碟基板取出區域R1,首先在取出區域A2取出被積 層在光碟保持器7上之第1和第2光碟基板la, lb。在 這種情況,為箸防止一次取出2片之光碟基板,最好使 用第2圖,第18圖,第19圖所示之彈性施加裝置22, 22' ,2 2 丨,0 當取出指定量之光碟基板時,光碟保持器7成為變空 -6 4 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------I-------裝--------訂---------典 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·. 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(w ) 狀態,該變空之光碟保持器7經由搬蓮路徑33被搬蓮到 光碟積層區域K 4。 依此方式取出之第1和第2光碟基板la, lb中之第1 光碟基板la依照與第1實施形態相同之步驟,利用落下 照射裝置4使正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物落下到其一 面,然後在重疊裝置5進行與第2光碟基板lb重疊。 利用第1和第2光碟基板la,lb之重疊所形成之光碟 1〇,被搬蓮裝置19從重疊裝置5搬蓮到光碟積層/分離 裝置D”。搬運裝置19如第25圖之模式方式所示,具備有 把持部191,192,193,194可以用來把持/解放該光碟 1 〇和剛體碟8 。 該等把持部191至194中之把持部193具備有與第7圖 所示之同軸搬運裝置6中之真空吸著部62和空氣撿拾部 6 3同樣之構造,在第1和第2光碟基la, lb之軸心成為 同軸之狀態,可以搬蓮光碟10。另外,把持部191至194 以等間隔被配置在一直線上,該間隔與光碟積層/分離 裝置D &quot;之第1位置1 1 M和第4位置1 3 M之間隔一致。3外 ,把持部191至194從平面看時,可以沿著光碟積層/分 離裝置D &quot;之第1位置1 1 ’和第4位置1 3 π之連結直線L 1上 進行連動。 利用該搬蓮裝置1 9將光碟1 G從重疊裝置5側移載到光 碟積層/分離裝置D &quot;側,首先,在把持部1 9 1至1 9 4中, 利用被配置在最靠近重疊裝置5側之把持部1 9 1用來把 持在重疊裝置5形成之光碟,把持部191與192, 193, 一 6 5 _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 470952 B7_ 五、發明說明(Μ ) 1 9 4 一起沿著直線L 1移動,用來將光碟1 0供給到按壓裝 置3 5 (參照第2 4圖)。 按壓裝置35如第26圖所示,具有互相面對之一對之按 壓部36,36可以用來把持光碟10之上面和下面。當將光 碟1Q供給到按壓裝置35時,該按壓裝置35就利用其按壓 部36從上面和下面按壓光碟10。其中,按壓裝置35形成 在按壓部3 6, 3 6間保持有如第2 6圖所示之指定之間隔△ h ,利用這種方式,構成光碟1ϋ之第1和第2光碟基板la ,1 b亦以保持指定間隔之狀態被配置成互相面對。以此 種狀態經過指定之時間,可以用來使第1和第2光碟基 板1 a , 1 b間之正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物4 5被展延。 另外,該間隔Ah被設定在可以進行良好之展延之值。 在按壓裝置35中進行過展延處理之光碟10,這時被把 持部192把持。把持部192將光碟1D搬運到同軸搬運緩衝 器1 9 5 (參照第2 4圖)。然後,供給到同軸搬蓮緩衝器1 9 5 之光碟10被把持部193把持,在第1和第2光碟基板la, lb成為同軸之狀態,供給到被配置在光碟積層/分離裝 置D”之第1位置11&quot;之光碟保持器7上。 這時,在位於光碟積層/分離裝置D”之光碟保持器7 已經被配置有光碟8 ,所以在該處將光碟10重疊在剛體 碟8上。 當利用把持部1 9 3將光碟1 0供給到位於第1位置1 1 ”之 光碟保持器7時,把持部1 9 4就如第2 5 ( b )圖所示的位於 光碟積層/分離裝置D&quot;之第4位置13”上。在把持部193 -6 6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------略 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)470952 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (w) D. At the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th positions 1 1 1 7 7 18 18 It is used, and in the first and second conveying paths CP 1 and CP 2, the disc holder 7 is used in a loop. In this way, the rigid disc 8 and the disc holder 7 can be recycled, thereby realizing an efficient manufacturing process. In this case, since the first and second conveying paths CP1 and CP2 are formed orthogonal to the plane P1, the recycling of the disc holder 7 does not require a lot of plane space, and the disc can be efficiently carried out in a limited space. The retainer 7 is used cyclically. [Third Embodiment] A manufacturing example of D V D according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. The structures common to the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. The schematic structure of the DVD manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 24 is composed of a disc substrate take-out area R1, a disc production area R2, and a disc laminated area R4. The structure of the disc substrate take-out area includes a storage area A1, in which the first disc substrate 1a and the second disc substrate 1b are laminated and held by the disc holder 7; and the take-out area A2, for the disc holder 7 Hold the first and second optical disc substrates la, lb, and take out each one. In addition, the structure of the disc manufacturing region R 2 is provided with: a dropping irradiation device 4 for dropping a positive ion ultraviolet curing resin onto the first optical disc substrate la; and a heavy-duty device 5 for dropping the first optical disc substrate la Youzheng-63- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------------ Order ---- ----- Line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7_ V. Description of the Invention (^) The surface of the ion-type UV-curing resin becomes the face The second optical disc substrate 1 b is used to overlap the first and second optical disc substrates 1a and 1b, and the connection device 19 is used to carry the optical disc 1Q formed in the overlapping device 5; the optical disc stacking / separating device D "is used to Performing the extension and hardening of the disc i 0; and a transfer device 2G for loading the disc 10 from the disc stacking / separating device D 'to the disc inspection area R 3. 5. In addition, the disc inspection area R3 consists of the disc The inspection device 31 is configured to check the good or bad of the formed optical disc 10. The optical disc stacking area R4 is selected / accumulated by the optical disc. The layer device 32 is configured to discharge the optical disc 10 for defective products, and to stack the optical disc 1G judged to be non-defective on the optical disc holder 7. The disc substrate take-out area R1, the optical disc production area R2, and the optical disc inspection The area K 3 and the optical disc laminated area R 4 are arranged in order to have an approximately U-shape when viewed from a plane. At the beginning and end of the U-shape, the optical disc substrate take-out area R 1 and the optical disc laminated area R 4 are respectively arranged. A transport path 33 is formed between the substrate take-out area R1 and the disc laminated area R4 to carry the empty disc holder 7. The DVD manufacturing process of this embodiment will be briefly described below. In the disc substrate take-out area R1, first, In the area A2, the first and second disc substrates la, lb laminated on the disc holder 7 are taken out. In this case, in order to prevent the two disc substrates from being taken out at a time, it is preferable to use FIG. 2 and FIG. 18, The elastic application device 22, 22 ', 2 2 丨, 0 shown in Fig. 19 When the specified amount of the disc substrate is taken out, the disc holder 7 becomes empty-6 4-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Grid (210 X 297 mm) ------ I ------- Installation -------- Order --------- Code (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again.) ·. 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. State of Invention (w), the empty disc holder 7 is moved to the disc stacking area K through the path 33 4. In this way, the first optical disc substrate la of the first and second optical disc substrates la and lb is removed in accordance with the same procedure as in the first embodiment, and the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition is dropped to the On one side, the second disc substrate 1b is then superposed on the superimposing device 5. The optical disc 10 formed by the overlap of the first and second optical disc substrates 1a and 1b is moved by the moving device 19 from the overlapping device 5 to the optical disc stacking / separating device D ". The conveying device 19 is shown in the pattern of Fig. 25 As shown, the holding parts 191, 192, 193, and 194 can be used to hold / release the optical disc 10 and the rigid body 8. Among the holding parts 191 to 194, the holding parts 193 are provided as shown in FIG. The vacuum suction unit 62 and the air pick-up unit 63 in the coaxial conveying device 6 have the same structure, and the axes of the first and second disc substrates la and lb become coaxial, so that the optical disc 10 can be moved. In addition, the holding portion 191 to 194 are arranged at regular intervals on a straight line, and this interval is consistent with the interval between the first position 1 1 M and the fourth position 1 3 M of the optical disc stacking / separating device D &quot;. Furthermore, the holding portions 191 to 194 When viewed in plan, it can be linked along the connecting line L 1 of the first position 1 1 ′ and the fourth position 1 3 π of the optical disk stacking / separating device D. The optical disk 1 G is used to remove the optical disk 1 G from The side of the superimposing device 5 is transferred to the disc stacking / separating device D &quot; side. First, the holding section 1 9 1 to 1 In 9 4, the holding portion 1 9 1 disposed on the side closest to the overlapping device 5 is used to hold the optical disc formed in the overlapping device 5. The holding portions 191 and 192, 193, 1 6 5 _ This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------------------- Order --------- line (Please read the Please fill in this page again for attention) A7 470952 B7_ V. Description of the invention (M) 1 9 4 Move along the line L 1 together to supply the disc 10 to the pressing device 3 5 (refer to Figure 24). As shown in FIG. 26, a pair of pressing portions 36, 36 facing each other can be used to hold the upper and lower sides of the optical disc 10. When the optical disc 1Q is supplied to the pressing device 35, the pressing device 35 uses the The pressing part 36 presses the optical disc 10 from above and below. Among them, the pressing device 35 is formed between the pressing parts 36, 36 and maintains a predetermined interval Δh as shown in FIG. 26, and in this way, the optical disc 1 is constructed. The first and second optical disc substrates la, 1 b are also arranged to face each other in a state of maintaining a predetermined interval. In this state, after a specified time has passed, it can be used The positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 45 between the first and second optical disc substrates 1 a and 1 b is stretched. The interval Ah is set to a value capable of good stretch. The pressing device 35 The optical disc 10 which has been subjected to the stretch processing during this time is held by the holding portion 192. The holding portion 192 carries the optical disc 1D to the coaxial carrying buffer 195 (refer to FIG. 24). Then, the optical disc 10 supplied to the coaxial transfer buffer 195 is held by the holding portion 193, and the first and second optical disc substrates 1a and 1b become coaxial and supplied to the optical disc stacking / separating device D ". The first position 11 &quot; is on the disc holder 7. At this time, the disc holder 7 located on the disc stacking / separating device D "is already equipped with the disc 8, so the disc 10 is superposed on the rigid disc 8 there. When the disc 1 10 is supplied to the disc holder 7 located at the first position 1 1 ”by the grip portion 1 3, the grip portion 1 9 4 is located in the disc stacking / separating device as shown in FIG. 2 5 (b). D &quot; 4th position 13 ". In the holding section 193 -6 6-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Slightly (please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page)

訂---------線L 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 470952 B7 五、發明說明(K ) 解放第1位置1 1 &quot;之同時,利用把持部1 9 4用來把持剛體 碟8 。然後,如第2 5 ( a )圖所示,使把持部1 9 4和把持部 1 9 1 , 1 9 2, 1 9 3 —起移動到第1位置1 1 ”,當解放剛體碟 8時,可以使剛體碟8重疊在位於第1位置1 1 ”之光碟 1 0上。 這時,這時把持部1 9 3移到到光碟等待部1 9 5上,把持 部192移動到按壓裝置35,把持部191移動到重疊裝置5 ,所以利用把持部1 9 1,1 9 2, 1 9 3可以把持位於重疊裝 置5 ,按壓裝置3 5,光碟等待部1 9 5之光碟1 G,然後使 該等把持部191, 192, 193移動到第25圖中之(b)所示之 位置,經由解放光碟1G,用來使光碟10順序的從重疊裝 置5移載到光碟積層/分離裝置D ”側。 然後再度的在第25(b)圖之狀態中,利用把持部194把 持剛體碟8 ,當使把持部194成為第25(a)圖所示之狀態 解放剛體殼8時,可以使剛體碟8積層在第1位置1 1 &quot; 。亦即,利用該搬蓮裝置1 9時可以將光碟1 D順序的從重 疊裝置5移載到光碟積層/分離裝置D&quot;,和在第1位置 1 1 π可以交替的積層剛體碟8和光碟1 0。 光碟積層/分離裝置D&quot;以被配置在同一圓周上之第1 位置1 1 &quot;,第5位置1 5 π ,第6位置1 6 π,第2位置1 7 π, 第3位置1 8 &quot;,和第4位置1 3 π之中心R作為旋轉中心, 使光碟保持器7順序的移動循環。利用上逑之搬運裝置 19,當在第1位置11”之光碟保持器7上重疊指定量之 光碟10和剛體碟8時,光碟積層/分離裝置D&quot;就使該光 -6 7 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------------訂--------•線 j (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 470952 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(A ) 碟保持器7移動到第5位置1 5 &quot;,使其經過指定之時間 。利用這種方式,可以確實進行光碟10中之正離子型紫 外線硬化性組成物之展延。 然後,光碟積層/分離裝置D&quot;使裝載有光碟1G之光碟 保持器7移動到第6位置1 6 &quot;,藉以進行端面硬化處理 (硬化促進處理)。端面處理用來達成以下之目的。因為 從光碟1 0之貼合面露出到外部之正離子型紫外線硬化性 組成物之硬化變慢,所以會造成光碟之手工處理上之問 題。這時,利用將紫外線照射在該端面,或是利用以加 熱器38對光碟進行加溫等之手段,可以促進正離子型紫 外線硬化性組成物之硬化。 其次,光碟積層/分離裝置D”將裝載有光碟10之光碟 保持器7移動到第2位置1 7 &quot;。在該第2位置1 7 ”利用移 載裝置20使光碟10和剛體碟8分離。移載裝置20如第27 圖所示,具備有把持部2 0 1,2 0 2,2 ϋ 3。把持部2 0 1,2 0 2 ,2 0 3形成可把持/解放該光碟1 0和剛體碟8 ,和以等 間隔被配置在一直線上。另外,該等把持部2 01,2 0 2, 2 0 3之間隔形成與第2位置1 7 ”和第3位置1 8 ”間之間隙 一致。另外,把持部201, 202,203在平面看時,形成 可以沿著第2位置1 7 ”和第3位置1 8 ”之連結直線L 2上進 行連動。 該等把持部201, 202,203中之接近光碟積層/分離 裝置D &quot;之一側之把持部2 Q 1,首先如第2 7 (a )圖所示,用 來把持第2位置1 7 ”之光碟保持器7上之剛體碟8 。然 一 68- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------I------裝--------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ▼•丨 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(W ) 第 如 碟 體 剛 2 放 部解 持由 把經 使中 後其 =’置 18位 置 3 位第 3 在 第層 到積 動 8 移碟 的體 示剛 所使 圖以 b)可 置 2 位部Order --------- Line L Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 470952 B7 V. Description of the invention (K) Free the first position 1 1 &quot; At the same time, use the holding part 1 9 4 Come hold the rigid body disc 8. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the holding portion 194 and the holding portion 1 9 1, 1 9 2, 1 9 3 are moved together to the first position 1 1 ”when the rigid body 8 is released , The rigid body disc 8 can be superimposed on the optical disc 10 located at the first position 1 1 ″. At this time, the holding portion 193 is moved to the disc waiting portion 195, the holding portion 192 is moved to the pressing device 35, and the holding portion 191 is moved to the overlapping device 5. Therefore, the holding portion 1 9 1, 1 9 2, 1 is used. 9 3 can be located in the overlapping device 5, press the device 3 5, the disc 1 G of the disc waiting section 1 9 5, and then move the holding sections 191, 192, 193 to the position shown in (b) of FIG. 25 Through the liberation of the optical disc 1G, it is used to sequentially transfer the optical disc 10 from the overlapping device 5 to the optical disc stacking / separating device D "side. Then, in the state shown in FIG. 25 (b), the rigid body disc is held by the holding portion 194 8. When the holding part 194 is set to the state shown in FIG. 25 (a), the rigid body shell 8 can be liberated, and the rigid disc 8 can be laminated in the first position 1 1 &quot; That is, when using the lotus device 19 The disc 1 D can be sequentially transferred from the overlapping device 5 to the disc stacking / separating device D &quot;, and the rigid disc 8 and disc 10 can be alternately stacked at the first position 1 1 π. The disc stacking / separating device D &quot; 1st position 1 1 &quot;, 5th position 1 5 π, 6th position 1 6 π arranged on the same circumference The center R of the 2nd position 1 7 π, the 3rd position 1 8 &quot;, and the 4th position 1 3 π is used as the rotation center, so that the disc holder 7 is sequentially moved in a cycle. Using the upper carrying device 19, when the When a specified amount of disc 10 and rigid body disc 8 are superimposed on the disc holder 7 at 1 position 11 ", the disc stacking / separating device D &quot; makes the light-6 7-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) ---------------------- Order -------- • Line j (Please read the notes on the back before filling This page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 470952 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (A) The disc holder 7 is moved to the fifth position 1 5 &quot; Specified time. In this manner, the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition in the optical disc 10 can be reliably extended. Then, the optical disc stacking / separating device D &quot; moves the optical disc holder 7 on which the optical disc 1G is loaded to the sixth position 16 &quot;, thereby performing an end surface hardening process (hardening promoting process). End face treatment is used to achieve the following purposes. Since the hardening of the cation-type ultraviolet curable composition exposed from the bonding surface of the optical disc 10 to the outside becomes slower, it causes a problem in the manual processing of the optical disc. At this time, hardening of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition can be promoted by irradiating ultraviolet rays on the end surface or by heating the optical disc with the heater 38. Next, the optical disc stacking / separating device D "moves the optical disc holder 7 loaded with the optical disc 10 to the second position 17". At the second position 17 ", the optical disc 10 is separated from the rigid disc 8 by the transfer device 20. . As shown in FIG. 27, the transfer device 20 includes gripping portions 2 0 1, 2 0 2, 2 ϋ 3. The holding portions 2 0 1, 2 2, and 2 3 are formed so as to be able to hold / release the optical disc 10 and the rigid body disc 8, and are arranged on a straight line at equal intervals. In addition, the intervals between the holding portions 2 01, 2 02, and 02 3 are formed to coincide with the gap between the second position 17 ″ and the third position 18 ″. In addition, the grip portions 201, 202, and 203 are formed so as to be capable of interlocking along the connecting line L2 at the second position 17 "and the third position 18" when viewed in plan. Among the holding portions 201, 202, and 203, the holding portion 2 Q 1 near one side of the disc stacking / separating device D &quot; is first used to hold the second position 1 7 as shown in FIG. 7 (a). The rigid disc 8 on the disc holder 7 of the "". Ranyi 68- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ I ------ pack- ------- Order --------- Line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ▼ • 丨 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (W) 2 The release of the part is achieved by putting the warrior in its position = '18 position, 3rd position, 3rd position on the first floor, and JieJong 8 moves the disc. The figure is b), 2 positions can be set.

碟上 光&quot;7 之L 第 7 把为 持 為Εί後 因2ί到 ,2 動 時部移 這持的 。 把示 上用所 7 利圖 器以a) 持所7( 保 2 持 第把 於使 位和 査 檢 碟 光 之 逑 所 面 ” 為 17因 置 1 ο 位 2 2 部 第持 以把 可時 10這 碟在 光 , ,外 時另 ο 11 〇 碟31 光置 放裝 解査 當 撿 ,碟 上光 3 到 置載 裝移 2 碟碟 第體光 如剛使 置 位 2 第 於 位 的 示 所 圖 二 W 可”體 以17剛 所置之 ,位離 上 2 分 7Π第將 1在以 , 可 作和 , 離 此分 複 〇〇 重碟 由體 經剛 。和 持 把 以 積 置 裝 查 檢 碟 光 於 位 ο 3 上20 7 部 器持 持把 保 , 碟中 光圖 之b) &quot; yV 8 7 1 2 置第 位在 3 , 第外 在另 層 { 置 27裝 第離 在分 , // 上別 3 選 部 持 把 中 圖 後 於 位 第 在 3 ο 2 部 持 把 當 此 因 碟置 光位 之之 述b) 所7( ?*- 面 ------1------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . 碟 ,部光 時持將 持 把 來 用 第 在 光 從 把以置 當可裝 1 ,截 外10分 另碟 / ,光別 10放選 碟解碟 光由光 之經到 上 ,載 31時移 置置31 裝位置 査之裝 檢圔査 碟(a)撿 光7(碟 訂---------線一 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 上位 7 1 器第 持用 保利 碟 , 光中 之其 8 5 ^—ί” 置13 位置 3 位 第 4 在第 層到 積運 ,搬 面被 方 8 一 碟 外體 另剛 之 業 作 疊 tlBll 3 之 8 碟 體 剛 和 ο 1X 碟 光 之 A—Η 1 置 光 之 1± 3 钱 裝 査 檢 碟 光 到 钱 HE 移 D 置 裝 0 分 / 層 積 碟 光 從 上32 如置 10裝 碟層 光積 之 / 後別 査選 撿碟 C 光 查到 撿載 之移 良被 不 3 ο / 2 良部 行持 進把 處由 該經 在 , 10述 碟所 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(以) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 。其中,在光碟檢査裝置31中判定為不良品者被選別, 只有判定為不是不良品者經由搬蓮路徑3 3,積層在從光 碟基板取出區域R 1側移動來到之光碟保持器7上。依照 這種方式積層之光碟10,被裝載在光碟保持器7 ,然後 被搬蓮到下一個工程。 依照上述之DVD製造裝置時,在光碟積層/分離裝置 D'因為在被配置於同一圓周上之第1位置11” ,第5 位置1 5 ”,第6位置1 6 π,第2位置1 7 π,第3位置1 8 &quot;, 和第4位置1 3 ”中,使光碟保持器7順序的移動循璟, 所以可以以簡單之構造實現光碟保持器7之循璟和再利 用。 S外,因為以使搬蓮裝置19之把持部183, 184在直線 L 1上連動之方式,可以在第1位置Η &quot;使剛體碟8和光 碟10交替的積層,所以可以有效的搬蓮光碟1D藉以提高 生産效率。 另外,在移載裝置20中之把持部201,202在直線L2上 進行連動,在第2位置1 7 ”使剛體碟8和光碟1 0分離, 所以可以使該等剛體碟8和光碟10有效的分離,藉以提 高生産效率。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 另外,因為光碟基板取出區域R1和光碟積層區域R4由 搬蓮路徑33加以連結,使變空之光碟保持器7可以循璟 利用,所以可以更有效的蓮用光碟保持器7 。另外,因 為光碟基板取出區域R1,光碟製成區域R2,光碟檢査區 域R3,和光碟積層區域R4被配置成近似U字狀,所以搬 -70-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 A7 B7 五、發明說明(w) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 蓮 路 徑 3 3可 以 變 短 1 而 且 可 以 獲 得 優 良 之 空 間 效 率 0 另 外 1 在 上 逑 之 各 個 實 施 形 態 之 光 碟 製 造 裝 置 中 在 厂 正 離 子 型 紫 外 線 硬 化 性 組 成 物 4 5之 落 下 展 延 J 和 厂 正 離 子 型 紫 外 線 硬 化 性 組 成 物 4 5 之 端 面 硬 化 J 之 一 方 或 雙 方 之 工 程 f 可 以 經 由 設 置 除 濕 裝 置 在 低 溫 度 之 璟 境 下 進 行 該 處 理 9 用 來 防 止 正 離 子 型 紫 外 線 硬 化 性 組 成 物 4 5 之 硬 化 受 阻 〇 [産業上之利用可能性] .Λ 本 發 明 之 光 碟 製 造 裝 置 是 以 待 別 之 貼 合 方 式 用 來 製 造 DVD 等 之 光 碟 9 在 事 刖 以 紫 外 線 昭 射 正 離 子 型 紫 外 線 硬 化 性 組 成 物 , 然 後 利 用 靜 置 平 面 在 光 碟 基 板 進 行 展 延 藉 以 製 造 光 碟 所 以 可 以 獲 不 空 氣 捲 入 和 不 有 硬 度 不 均 之 光 碟 3 而 旦 可 以 避 免 貼 合 後 之 光 碟 之 變 形 〇 參 考 符 號 說 明 1 a •第1 光碟基板 lb •第2 光碟基板 2 . 搬 蓮 裝 置 3 . 旋 轉 台 4 . 落 下 昭 射 裝 置 5 . 重 疊 裝 置 6 . 同 軸 搬 蓮 裝 置 7 . 光 碟 保 持 器 8 . 剛 體 碟 9 . 搬 蓮 路 徑 10 .光碟 -71- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)On the disc, the 7th of the "L" of the light was held as Εί. After the 2nd movement, the movement shifted from time to time. Use the 7 sharp tools on the display to a) hold the 7 (guaranteed the 2nd position in the position of the ambassador and check the disc light) "is set to 17 because of 1 ο the 2nd position 2 to hold the time 10 This disc is in the light, and the other time is ο 11 〇 disc 31. Place the light and check it when you pick it up. The light on the disc 3 is moved to the loading position. The 2nd disc is the body light. Figure II W can be placed on the body with just 17 points, 2 points away from the top, and 7 will be the first one, you can make a peace, and then separate the 00 heavy disc from the body by the body. The disc is in position ο 3 and 20 7 devices are kept under control. B) &quot; yV 8 7 1 2 Set the position at 3, and the outer layer on the other side. // The top 3 selections in the upper part are in the third place after the middle position. The 2 positions are in the light of the disc b. So 7 (? *-面 ------ 1-- ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). For the disc, the light can be used for the first time, and can be installed in the light from the handle. Don't play 10 discs The disc light is moved from the light to the top. At 31 o'clock, it is placed at 31. Installation inspection and inspection of the installation position. (A) Pick up the light 7 (disc order --------- Line 1 Intellectual Property Bureau employee) Consumption cooperative prints a high-end poly disc held by the 7th container, which is 8 in the light 5 ^ —ί ”Set 13th position 3rd place 4th on the first floor to Jiyun, and the surface is covered by the square 8 Make stack tlBll 3 of 8 disc body and ο 1X disc light A—Η 1 set the light 1 ± 3 money to check the disc light to money HE shift D to install 0 points / laminated disc light from above 32 as set 10 The optical layer of the loading layer / Do n’t check after picking up the disc C. The light pick-up is not 3 ο / 2 The good part is held by the handle. The paper size of the disc is applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (with) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Among them, those who are judged to be defective in the disc inspection device 31 are rejected In the selection, only those who are judged to be non-defective pass through the moving path 33, and are stacked in the region R for taking out from the optical disc substrate. One side moves to the disc holder 7. The disc 10 laminated in this way is loaded in the disc holder 7 and then moved to the next project. According to the above-mentioned DVD manufacturing device, the optical disk stacking / separating device D 'is located at the first position 11 ", the fifth position 1 5", the sixth position 1 6 π, and the second position 1 7 arranged on the same circumference. π, the 3rd position 1 8 &quot;, and the 4th position 1 3 ”cause the disc holder 7 to be sequentially moved, so that the disc holder 7 can be tracked and reused with a simple structure. S 外Since the holding parts 183 and 184 of the lotus transfer device 19 are linked on the straight line L 1, the rigid body disc 8 and the optical disc 10 can be laminated alternately, so the lotus disc 1D can be efficiently moved. In order to improve the production efficiency. In addition, the gripping portions 201 and 202 in the transfer device 20 are linked on the straight line L2 to separate the rigid disc 8 and the optical disc 10 at the second position 17 ", so that such rigid discs can be made. 8 and optical disc 10 are effectively separated, thereby improving production efficiency. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, because the disc substrate take-out area R1 and the disc laminated area R4 are connected by the moving path 33, the empty disc holder 7 can be used in a loop, so it can be used more efficiently. Use the disc holder 7. In addition, because the disc substrate take-out area R1, the disc production area R2, the disc inspection area R3, and the disc laminated area R4 are configured to be approximately U-shaped, the -70- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (w) Printed lotus path printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 3 3 can be shortened 1 and excellent space efficiency can be obtained 0 In addition 1 each of the above In the optical disc manufacturing apparatus of the embodiment, one or both of the process f of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 4 5 and the end hardening J of the positive ion-type ultraviolet curable composition 4 5 can be set by setting The dehumidifier performs this treatment in a low temperature environment 9 to prevent the hardening of the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition 4 5 from being blocked. [Industrial application possibility]. Λ This hair Mingzhi's optical disc manufacturing device is used to manufacture DVDs and other discs that are laminated together. 9 In this case, a positive-ion ultraviolet curable composition is projected with ultraviolet rays, and then a static plane is used to extend the optical disc substrate to manufacture optical discs. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the optical disc 3 without air entrapment and without uneven hardness, and the deformation of the optical disc after bonding can be avoided. Reference symbol description 1 a • 1st disc substrate lb • 2nd disc substrate 2. Moving lotus device 3 Rotary table 4. Falling projection device 5. Overlap device 6. Coaxial lotus device 7. Optical disc holder 8. Rigid body disc 9. Moving lotus path 10. CD-71- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) This paper Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

470952 A8 B8 C8 D8 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 第881 16409號「光碟製造裝置」專利案 (90年07月23日修正) 六申請專利範圍: 1. 一種光碟製造裝置,其特徵是具備有: 噴嘴,用來噴出正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物; 紫外線照射裝置,在從噴嘴落下之正離子型紫外線硬 化性組成物到達光碟基板之期間,用來照射紫外線;和 重疊裝置,用來使2片光碟基板之落下有該正離子型 紫外線硬化性組成物之面成爲互相面對的重疊成爲1片 之光碟。 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項之光碟製造裝置,其中具備有用 以裝載該光碟之靜置平坦面,用來使該重疊裝置所重疊 之該2片光碟基板間之該正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物 進行展延。 3. 如申請專利範圍第2項之光碟製造裝置,其中具備有: 積層裝置,用來使該光碟成爲多片積層;和剛體碟裝載裝 置,在使該光碟成爲多片積層之過程中將具有平坦面之 剛體碟裝載在該光碟上。 4. 如申請專利範圍第3項之光碟製造裝置,其中 具備有光碟積層/分離裝置,用來使具有平坦面之剛 體碟積層在光碟,使該正離子型紫外線硬化性組成物進 行展延,和在完成展延之後使該光碟和該剛體碟分離; 該光碟積層/分離裝置具備有: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公f ) . 裝 —訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 470952470952 A8 B8 C8 D8 0 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 6. Patent application scope No. 881 16409 "Optical disc manufacturing device" patent case (Amended on July 23, 1990). Six patent scope: The manufacturing device is characterized by comprising: a nozzle for ejecting a positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition; and an ultraviolet irradiation device for irradiating ultraviolet rays while the positive ion type ultraviolet curable composition falling from the nozzle reaches the optical disc substrate. And a superimposing device, which is used to make the surfaces of the two disc substrates on which the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition is dropped become one disc that overlaps with each other. 2. For example, the optical disc manufacturing device of the scope of patent application, which has a stationary flat surface for loading the optical disc, and is used to make the positive ion ultraviolet curing between the two optical disc substrates overlapped by the overlapping device. The composition is stretched. 3. For example, the optical disc manufacturing device under the scope of patent application No. 2 includes: a lamination device for making the optical disc into multiple laminations; and a rigid body loading device for having the optical disc into multiple laminations. A flat body rigid disc is mounted on the disc. 4. For example, the optical disc manufacturing device in the third scope of the patent application includes an optical disc stacking / separating device for stacking a rigid disc with a flat surface on the optical disc to extend the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition, And after the extension is completed, the optical disc and the rigid disc are separated; the optical disc stacking / separating device is provided with: This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 male f). ------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 470952 A8 Β8ί . C8 # 1 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 光碟保持器,由基台和心軸所構成,和配置在互不相 同之第1和第2位置;光碟保持器循環裝置,用來使位於 該第1和第2位置之該光碟保持器順序的移動循環; 積層裝置,用來使該光碟和剛體碟交替的積層在位於 該第1位置之光碟保持器上;和 分離裝置,用來使位於該第2位置之該光碟保持器上 之重疊之該光碟和剛體碟分別產生分離,和使分離後之 該剛體碟積層在位於與該第1和第2位置不同之第3位 置之光碟保持器上; 位於該第3位置之光碟保持器,在該光碟保持器上積 層有該剛體碟之狀態,可以移動到與該第1至第3位置 均不相同之第4位置;和 該積層裝置利用位於該第4位置之光碟保持器上所 積層之該剛體碟,用來進行該光碟和該剛體碟之重疊。 5_如申請專利範圍第1至4項之任何一項之光碟製造裝 置,其中在該噴嘴之吐出開口邊設有紫外線曝光防止蓋 〇 6·如申請專利範圍第1至4項之任何一項之光碟製造裝 置,其中具備有: 保持裝置,用來保持該光碟; 同軸裝置,用來使該2片光碟基板之孔部之內壁面 位置互相一致;和 移動裝置,用來使該保持裝置和該同軸裝置同時 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 470952 y1) Α8 Β8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 動。 7. 如申請專利範圍第1至4項之任何一項之光碟製造裝 置,其中具備有加熱處理裝置用來對多片積層之該光碟 進行加熱處理。 8. 如申請專利範圍第1至4項之任何一項之光碟製造裝 置,其中具備有: 光碟基板取出區域,用來從以積層狀態保持多片光碟 基板之光碟保持器中一次取出1片之光碟基板; 光碟製成區域,具備有該噴嘴和該紫外線照射裝置, 用來使被取出之2片光碟基板經由該正離子型紫外線 硬化性組成物貼合成爲1片之光碟; 光碟檢查區域,用來檢查所獲得之光碟;和 光碟積層區域,用來使完成檢查後之光碟積層在該 光碟保持器。 裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 iU氏張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉A8 Β8ί. C8 # 1 D8 VI. Scope of patent application (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The disc holder is composed of the abutment and the mandrel, and the first and second configurations are different from each other. Position; disc holder circulation device for circulating the disc holders in the first and second positions in sequence; layering device for alternately stacking the disc and rigid disc at the first position An optical disc holder; and a separating device for separating the disc and the rigid body disc that are overlapped on the optical disc holder at the second position, and separating the rigid disc layer after being separated from the first disc On the disc holder at the third position which is different from the second position; On the disc holder located at the third position, the rigid disc is stacked on the disc holder, and can be moved to the first to third positions. The fourth position, which is different from each other; and the layering device uses the rigid disc laminated on the disc holder located at the fourth position to overlap the optical disc and the rigid disc. 5_ The optical disc manufacturing device according to any one of the items 1 to 4 of the scope of patent application, wherein an ultraviolet exposure prevention cover is provided at the ejection opening of the nozzle. 6 · As any one of the first to 4 scopes of patent application The optical disc manufacturing device includes: a holding device for holding the optical disk; a coaxial device for matching the positions of the inner wall surfaces of the hole portions of the two optical disk substrates with each other; and a moving device for making the holding device and At the same time, this coaxial device applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 470952 y1) Α8 Β8 C8 D8. 7. The optical disc manufacturing device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which includes a heat treatment device for performing heat treatment on a plurality of laminated optical discs. 8. The optical disc manufacturing device according to any one of the items 1 to 4 of the patent application scope, which includes: a disc substrate take-out area for taking out one piece of the disc holder at a time from a disc holder holding a plurality of disc substrates in a laminated state. Optical disc substrate; an optical disc manufacturing area, provided with the nozzle and the ultraviolet irradiation device, for taking out the two optical disc substrates into a single optical disc through the positive ion ultraviolet curable composition; an optical disc inspection area, It is used for inspecting the obtained optical disc; and the disc stacking area is used for making the optical disc laminated on the disc holder after the inspection is completed. Packing -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The iU's sheet printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm)
TW088116409A 1997-12-26 1999-09-23 Optical disk manufacturing apparatus TW470952B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP9361523A JPH11189748A (en) 1997-12-26 1997-12-26 Pasting together, device therefor, and production of light disk
JP10076304A JPH11273164A (en) 1998-03-24 1998-03-24 Production of disk and disk production apparatus
JP11078697A JP2000276786A (en) 1999-03-23 1999-03-23 Method and device for lamination and production of optical disk
JP7869699 1999-03-23
JP11180965A JP2001014732A (en) 1999-06-25 1999-06-25 Device for laminating/separating object and optical disk manufacturing device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW470952B true TW470952B (en) 2002-01-01

Family

ID=27524614

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW088116409A TW470952B (en) 1997-12-26 1999-09-23 Optical disk manufacturing apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW470952B (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW212755B (en)
JP5426505B2 (en) Active energy ray-curable resin composition, adhesive layer, polarizing plate, optical film, and image display device
CN105445840B (en) Polarizing plate and optical laminate
TWI343409B (en)
TW201234059A (en) Method for producing polarizing plate
CN105445839B (en) Polarizing plate
TW470952B (en) Optical disk manufacturing apparatus
TW509937B (en) Video disc and its manufacturing method
TWI338894B (en) Resin layer forming apparatus and method for the same
JP2005227377A5 (en)
TWI245919B (en) Method for manufacturing a light deflect/color change lens from polycarbonate and other plastic materials
CN110888296A (en) Super-large flexible holographic screen and hard holographic screen based on super-large application scene
JP6935223B2 (en) A method for manufacturing a base film with a transparent adhesive layer, a method for manufacturing a transparent conductive film with a transparent adhesive layer, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
JP2004058573A (en) Antireflection film and antireflection-treated object
CN108075004A (en) Double glass photovoltaic modulies
JP5023142B2 (en) Manufacturing method of low wave neutron guide plane
CN206248955U (en) Polarization plates group and liquid crystal panel
JP3384090B2 (en) Transmission screen, transparent plate, method for manufacturing transmission screen, and method for manufacturing transparent plate
TW421720B (en) Filler lens and process for producing it
CN211293327U (en) Flexible substrate film, flexible holographic film, hard substrate film, and hard holographic film
WO2021104367A1 (en) Flexible holographic primitive film, preparation method therefor and application thereof
CN208484414U (en) A kind of medical film resistant to high temperature
JP4422249B2 (en) Manufacturing method of substrate covered with thin plate and manufacturing apparatus thereof
JP2000339785A (en) Sticking method and apparatus and production of optical disk
JP2001155387A (en) Method for manufacturing optical disk and optical disk

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent